Operating Instructions
VSX-60
AV Receiver
The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands
Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a
safe level – a level that lets the sound come through
clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most
importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound, so
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting
your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing
adapts.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF
THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM.
RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED
WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE
FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
D36-AP9-1_A1_En
CAUTION
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded
cables and connectors are used to connect the unit
to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic
interference with electric appliances such as radios
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors
ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL:
• Set your volume control at a low setting.
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
comfortably and clearly, without distortion.
• Once you have established a comfortable sound
level, set the dial and leave it there.
for connections.
D8-10-3a_A1_En
BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires
repair will be charged for even during the warranty
GUIDELINES:
• Do not turn up the volume so high that you can’t
hear what’s around you.
• Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in
potentially hazardous situations.
• Do not use headphones while operating a motorized
vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic
period.
K041_A1_En
hazard and is illegal in many areas.
S001a_A1_En
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
D8-10-1-3_A1_En
CAUTION:
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.
The top surface over the internal
heatsink may become hot when
operating this product continuously.
3
05 Basic playback
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating
instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.
Playing an iPod.................................................................................................................................................................40
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music ................................................................................................43
Contents
01 Before you start
06 Listening to your system
Checking what’s in the box................................................................................................................................................8
Installing the receiver.........................................................................................................................................................8
Loading the batteries..........................................................................................................................................................8
Operating range of remote control unit............................................................................................................................8
Selecting MCACC presets ...............................................................................................................................................47
Choosing the input signal................................................................................................................................................47
07 Playback with NETWORK features
02 Controls and displays
03 Connecting your equipment
08 Control with HDMI function
Connecting your equipment............................................................................................................................................16
Rear panel .........................................................................................................................................................................16
Placing the speakers........................................................................................................................................................18
Connecting the speakers.................................................................................................................................................19
Installing your speaker system........................................................................................................................................19
Selecting the Speaker system.........................................................................................................................................21
About the audio connection............................................................................................................................................21
About the video converter................................................................................................................................................22
About HDMI ......................................................................................................................................................................22
Connecting your TV and playback components............................................................................................................23
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources...............................................................25
Connecting AM/FM antennas.........................................................................................................................................28
Connecting to the network through LAN interface.......................................................................................................30
Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER.....................................................................................................................30
Connecting an iPod..........................................................................................................................................................31
Connecting a USB device................................................................................................................................................31
Connecting to a wireless LAN .........................................................................................................................................31
Connecting an IR receiver ...............................................................................................................................................32
Plugging in the receiver...................................................................................................................................................32
About the Control with HDMI function...........................................................................................................................56
Making Control with HDMI connections........................................................................................................................56
Before using synchronization..........................................................................................................................................56
About synchronized operations ......................................................................................................................................57
Setting the PQLS function...............................................................................................................................................57
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ................................................................................................................57
09 Using other functions
Switching the speaker terminals ....................................................................................................................................63
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls.....................................................................................................................................63
Making an audio or a video recording............................................................................................................................64
Using the sleep timer .......................................................................................................................................................64
Checking your system settings .......................................................................................................................................64
Resetting the system........................................................................................................................................................64
10 Controlling the rest of your system
About the Remote Setup menu.......................................................................................................................................67
Operating multiple receivers...........................................................................................................................................67
Setting the remote to control other components..........................................................................................................67
Selecting preset codes directly .......................................................................................................................................67
Programming signals from other remote controls .......................................................................................................68
Erasing one of the remote control button settings........................................................................................................68
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function .............................................................................................69
Direct function..................................................................................................................................................................69
Resetting the remote control settings............................................................................................................................69
Controlling components..................................................................................................................................................70
04 Basic Setup
Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)................................................................................................34
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) .....................................................................34
Operation Mode Setup.....................................................................................................................................................37
About the Home Menu.....................................................................................................................................................37
4
11 The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu ......................................................................................73
Automatic MCACC (Expert).............................................................................................................................................73
12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu...............................................................................................81
Manual speaker setup......................................................................................................................................................81
Checking the Network Information.................................................................................................................................84
The Other Setup menu.....................................................................................................................................................84
13 FAQ
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................................88
Power.................................................................................................................................................................................88
No sound...........................................................................................................................................................................88
ADAPTER PORT terminal ................................................................................................................................................90
Settings..............................................................................................................................................................................90
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output...............................................................................................................91
Display ...............................................................................................................................................................................91
Remote control .................................................................................................................................................................91
HDMI..................................................................................................................................................................................91
USB interface....................................................................................................................................................................93
iPod....................................................................................................................................................................................93
Network .............................................................................................................................................................................93
14 Additional information
Surround sound formats .................................................................................................................................................97
About iPod.........................................................................................................................................................................97
About SiriusXM.................................................................................................................................................................97
About FLAC .......................................................................................................................................................................97
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats..............................................................98
Speaker Setting Guide......................................................................................................................................................98
Important information regarding the HDMI connection............................................................................................100
Cleaning the unit ............................................................................................................................................................100
Glossary...........................................................................................................................................................................101
5
9
Basic playback (page 38)
Flow of settings on the receiver
j
10 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
! Using the various listening modes (page 45)
! Better sound using Phase Control (page 48)
Flow for connecting and setting the receiver
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used eas-
ily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9
! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 73)
! Changing the channel level while listening (page 82)
! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 59)
! Setting the PQLS function (page 57)
Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12
! Setting the Audio options (page 59)
! Setting the Video options (page 61)
Important
j
The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator CD-ROM
included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as in steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
and 8 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see About using AVNavigator (included
CD-ROM) on page 9.
11 Other optional adjustments and settings
! Control with HDMI function (page 55)
! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 72)
! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 80)
j
1
Before you start
! Checking what’s in the box on page 8
! Loading the batteries on page 8
12 Making maximum use of the remote control
! Operating multiple receivers (page 67)
j
! Setting the remote to control other components (page 67)
2
Determining the speakers’ application (page 17)
! 7.2 channel surround system (Front height)
! 7.2 channel surround system (Front wide)
! 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection
! 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)
! 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)
j
3
Connecting the speakers
! Placing the speakers on page 18
! Connecting the speakers on page 19
! Installing your speaker system on page 19
! Bi-amping your speakers on page 20
j
4
Connecting the components
! About the audio connection on page 21
! About the video converter on page 22
! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 23
! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 28
! Plugging in the receiver on page 32
j
5
Power On
j
6
7
Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 34)
j
MCACC speaker settings
! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34
j
8
The Input Setup menu (page 36)
(When using connections other than the recommended connections)
j
6
Before you start
Checking what’s in the box ............................................................................................................8
Installing the receiver......................................................................................................................8
Loading the batteries......................................................................................................................8
Operating range of remote control unit........................................................................................8
About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM).............................................................................9
7
01
Before you start
Checking what’s in the box
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:
CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:
! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
! Remote control unit
! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm system operation) x2
! AM loop antenna
! FM wire antenna
! iPod cable
! Power cord
! CD-ROM
! Never use new and old batteries together.
! Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.
! Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.
! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public insti-
tution’s rules that apply in your country/area.
(Symbol examples for batteries)
These symbols are only valid
in the European Union.
! Quick start guide
! Safety Brochure
! Warranty sheet
K058c_A1_En
Pb
Installing the receiver
! When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a level and stable surface.
! Don’t install it on the following places:
—on a color TV (the screen may distort)
—near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.
—in direct sunlight
Operating range of remote control unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
! There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver’s remote sensor.
! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor.
! The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays.
! The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit.
—in damp or wet areas
—in extremely hot or cold areas
—in places where there is vibration or other movement
—in places that are very dusty
—in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)
! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the power is on or just after it is turned off. The bottom panel
becomes hot when the power is on (or right after it is turned off) and could cause burns.
30°
30°
Loading the batteries
The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We rec-
ommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.
7 m (23 ft.)
WARNING
! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a
heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or perfor-
mance of batteries.
8
01
Before you start
Using AVNavigator
About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM)
The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the receiver’s connections
and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be completed easily simply by following
the instructions on the screen to make the connections and settings.
There are also other features enabling easy use of various functions, including an Interactive Manual that oper-
ates in association with the receiver, updating of various types of software, and MCACC Application that lets you
check the MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.
1
Click [AVNavigator 2012.I] on the desktop to launch AVNavigator.
AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi starts up. The language selection screen appears. Follow the instruc-
tions on the screen to make the connections and automatic settings.
Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the first time AVNavigator is launched.
2
Select and use the desired function.
AVNavigator includes the following functions:
! Wiring Navi – Guides you through connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial
settings can be made easily.
! Operation Guide – Describes the receiver’s playback operations and how to use several functions through
videos and illustrations.
! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays the pages explaining the functions that have been operated on
the receiver. It is also possible to operate the receiver from the Interactive Manual.
! Glossary – Displays glossary pages.
! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced MCACC measurement results vividly on the computer.
There are special operating instructions for MCACC Application. These instructions are included in the
AVNavigator Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them when using MCACC Application.
! Software Update – Allows various types of software to be updated.
! Settings – Used to make various AVNavigator settings.
Installing AVNavigator
1
Load the included CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.
The CD-ROM’s top menu screen appears.
2
3
Click ‘Install AVNavigator’ from the CD-ROM top menu.
Follow the instructions on the screen to install.
When “Finish” is selected, installation is completed.
4
Remove the included CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive.
Handling the CD-ROM
! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.
Operating Environment
! AVNavigator can be used with Microsoft® Windows® XP/Vista/7.
! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator functions. The supported browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
or 9.
Note
To use the AVNavigator of another model, first uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator, then install the
AVNavigator of the other model.
Precautions For Use
! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player.
Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause
impaired hearing due to the large volume.
Deleting the AVNavigator
You can use the following method to uninstall (delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.
License
%
Delete from the Control Panel of the PC.
From the Start menu, click “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d “AVNavigator 2012.I” d “Uninstall
! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling
to consent to the terms of its use.
AVNavigator 2012.I”.
Terms of Use
! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION. Unauthorized transfer,
duplication, broadcast, public transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such matters that go beyond
the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions.
Permission to use this CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER CORPORATION.
General Disclaimer
! PIONEER CORPORATION does not guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with respect to personal com-
puters using any of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER CORPORATION is not liable for any damages
incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible for any compensation. The names of private
corporations, products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective firms.
9
Controls and displays
Remote control ..............................................................................................................................11
Display............................................................................................................................................13
Front panel.....................................................................................................................................14
10
02
Controls and displays
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:
! White – Receiver control, TV control
! Blue – Other controls (See pages 40, 41, 42, 43 and 70.)
Remote control
This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.
1
u RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
ALL ZONE STBY
DISCRETE ON
RECEIVER
SOURCE
2
ALL ZONE STBY DISCRETE ON
1
2,3
RCU SETUP
BDR
11
Use this button to perform unique operations (page 69).
BD
TV
DVD
DVR
HDMI
3
RCU SETUP
Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode (page 67).
CD
NET
ADPT
4
4
Input function buttons
USB
CBL
SAT
OPTION
iPod
TUNER
Press to select control of other components (page 67).
12
13
RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
STATUS
Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input function (page 39).
5
Press
Receiver Control buttons
5
6
VOLUME
first to access:
INPUT
! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings (page 64).
! PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control (page 48).
! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting (page 57).
! AUTO S.RTRV – Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources (page 59).
! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets (page 47).
! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 47).
! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (page 82).
! SPEAKERS – Use to change the speaker terminal (page 63).
TV CONTROL
14
15
CH
VOL
MUTE
AUDIO
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
7
8
TOP MENU
TOOLS
MENU
! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 64).
! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 64).
ENTER
HOME
MENU
6
TV CONTROL buttons
RETURN
These buttons can be used to perform operations on the TV to which the TV CONTROL INPUT button is assigned.
The TV can be operated with these buttons regardless of the input set for the remote control’s operation mode
(page 67).
iPod CTRL
FEATURES
AUTO
5
5
PHASE
MPX
PQLS
S.RTRV
MCACC
PTY
7
Press
Receiver setting buttons
BAND
first to access:
! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio options (page 59).
! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video options (page 61).
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu (pages 34, 36, 56, 73 and 81).
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.
PRESET
TUNE
+Favorite
AUDIO
DISP
CH
1
2
5
3
SIGNAL SEL
CH LEVEL
4
6
8
i/j/k/l/ENTER
SPEAKERS DIMMER
SLEEP
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 73) and the Audio or Video options
(page 59 or 61).
7
8
9
D.ACCESS
CLASS
ENTER
/
CLR
CH
0
9
ZONE 2
AUTO/ALC/
ZONE 2
Z2
DIRECT STANDARD ADV SURR
Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 (page 63).
9
10 LISTENING MODE controls
LISTENING MODE
! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Auto Surround (page 46), Auto Level Control mode and Stream
Direct mode (page 47).
10
! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, etc.) (page 46).
! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 46).
RECEIVER
11 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.
11
02
Controls and displays
12 OPTION
The preset codes of desired devices can be registered in the remote control and button operations can be regis-
tered using the learning mode.
13
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands).
Switch to perform operations in the main zone.
Also use this button to set up surround sound.
14 VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
15 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
12
02
Controls and displays
8
Listening mode indicators
Display
! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on (page 46).
! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode is selected (page 46).
! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 47).
1
2
3
4 5
6
7 8
9
10
11 12
13
14 15
! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected (page 46).
! STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard Surround modes is switched on (page 46).
2
DIGITAL PLUS
DSD PCM
MULTI-ZONE
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER
TUNED
PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
MONO
AUTO
L
C
R
2
TrueHD
DTS HD ES 96/24
SL
SR
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
dB
XL XC XR
9
(PHASE CONTROL)
TV
DVD
BD DVR
CD TUNER
VIDEO
HDMI
USB
[ 2 ] [ 3 ]
MSTR
LFE
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 48).
iPod
[ 4 ]
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT
10 Analog signal indicators
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal (page 59).
2
PROLOGIC
ADV.SURROUND
x
Neo:6
STANDARD
SLEEP
SP AB
11 Tuner indicators
! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.
! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.
! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX.
8
16
17 18
19
20
1
Signal indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input sig-
12
nal automatically (page 47).
Lights when the sound is muted.
2
Program format indicators
Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.
! L/R – Left front/Right front channel
13 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level.
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates the maximum level.
! C – Center channel
14 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.
! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel
! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)
! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above
15 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.
! XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag
3
Digital format indicators
16 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system using SPEAKERS (page 63).
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.
! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital decoding.
! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding.
! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.
! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.
17 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 64).
18 Matrix decoding format indicators
! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 46).
! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 46).
! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.
! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.
! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.
! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.
! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signals.
19 Character display
Displays various system information.
20 Remote control mode indicator
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 85)
4
MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 63).
5
SOUND
Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (page 59).
6
PQLS
Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page 57).
7
S.RTRV
Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active (page 59).
13
02
Controls and displays
10 PHONES jack
Front panel
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.
11 Listening mode buttons
! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT – Switches between Auto Surround (page 46), Auto Level Control and
Stream Direct mode (page 47).
! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6,
Stereo etc.) (page 46).
! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between the various surround modes (page 46).
! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback mode (page 46).
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
7
8
ADVANCED
MCACC
FL OFF
HDMI
iPod iPhone iPad
SPEAKERS
CONTROL
–
MULTI-ZONE
–
ON/OFF
BAND
TUNER EDIT
TUNE
PRESET
ENTER
12 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 34).
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
STANDARD
SURROUND
ADVANCED
SURROUND
iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
STEREO
INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME
13 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as an audio and video source (page 31), or connect a USB device for
audio and photo playback (page 31).
SELECTOR
STANDBY/ON
PHONES
PUSH
OPEN
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI
5
INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC VIDEO
14 HDMI input connector
Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.) (page 31).
15 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL
Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 40).
9
10 11
12 13
14
15
Removing the front cover
1
u STANDBY/ON
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.
2
INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input function.
3
Indicators
! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 59).
! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (page 64).
! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped component; lights when the component is connected
(page 23).
Attaching the front cover
! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/iPhone/iPad is connected (page 31).
1
4
MULTI-ZONE controls
2
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page 29) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone
(page 63).
5
Character display
See Display on page 13.
6
TUNER controls
! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 42).
! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET k/l and ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall
(page 42).
! TUNE i/j – Find radio frequencies (page 42).
! PRESET k/l – Find preset stations (page 43).
7
Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control (page 8).
8
9
MASTER VOLUME dial
SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker terminal (page 63).
14
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your equipment.........................................................................................................16
Rear panel ......................................................................................................................................16
Determining the speakers’ application........................................................................................17
Placing the speakers......................................................................................................................18
Connecting the speakers...............................................................................................................19
Installing your speaker system.....................................................................................................19
Selecting the Speaker system.......................................................................................................21
About the audio connection.........................................................................................................21
About the video converter ...........................................................................................................22
About HDMI...................................................................................................................................22
Connecting your TV and playback components .........................................................................23
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources...............................25
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box........................................................26
Connecting other audio components ..........................................................................................27
Connecting AM/FM antennas.......................................................................................................28
MULTI-ZONE setup ........................................................................................................................29
Connecting to the network through LAN interface ...................................................................30
Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER...................................................................................30
Connecting an iPod........................................................................................................................31
Connecting a USB device ..............................................................................................................31
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input ......................................31
Connecting to a wireless LAN.......................................................................................................31
Connecting an IR receiver .............................................................................................................32
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger.....................................................32
Plugging in the receiver ................................................................................................................32
15
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter
explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Note
! The RS-232C terminal is exclusively for the installer.
! The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The Input
Setup menu on page 36 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
CAUTION
Input Terminals
Input function
! Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
HDMI
(BD)
IN 1
Audio
Component
IN 1
BD
DVD
! When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the
power outlets.
! Depending on the device being connected (amplifier, receiver, etc.), the methods of connection and terminal
names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating instructions of the respec-
tive devices.
COAX-1
COAX-2
OPT-2
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
TV
IN 2
IN 3
IN 2
OPT-1
HDMI 4
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
Rear panel
HDMI 5
(front panel)
ASSIGN-
ABLE
(
)
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN 10/100
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
DC OUTPUT
forWIRELESS LAN
HDMI 6
CD
AC IN
ASSIGNABLE
-
1
6
IN
(
1
)
IN
(
2
IN
1
IN
2
(
(
)
(
)
(
)
OUTPUT 5 V
0.6 A MAX
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
)
(
)
(
)
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
ANALOG-1
VIDEO
AUDIO
ZONE 2
PRE OUT
W1OOFER
SUB
MONITOR DVR/BDR
L
OUT
OUT
ADAPTER PORT
IR
OUT
R
IN
2
IN
DVD IN
SAT/
(
OUTPUT 5 V
OUT
CBL
IN
DVR/BDR
L
)
0.1 A MAX
12V
TRIGGER
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FRONT HEIGHT /WIDE /
ANTENNA
OUT
R
IN
B
A
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
IN
1
(
OUTPUT 12 V
50 mA MAX
AM LOOP
)
(
)
DVD
ASSIGNABLE
IN
2
L
(
DVR/
BDR)
IN
R
MONITOR
FM UNBAL
75
1
DVD SAT/CBL ANALOG IN
OUT
Y
PB
PR
(
)
CD
ASSIGNABLE
SPEAKERS
RS-232C COMPONENT VIDEO
16
03
Connecting your equipment
[B] 7.2 channel surround system (Front wide)
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW)
Determining the speakers’ application
This unit permits you to build various surround systems, in accordance with the number of speakers you have.
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels (L and R).
! It is also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers (SB) or neither.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
R
FWR
L
Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below.
SW 1
SR
C
SW 2
SL
FWL
Important
! The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see
Speaker system setting on page 81).
! Sound does not come through simultaneously from the front height, front wide, speaker B and surround back
speakers. Output speakers are different depending on the input signal or listening mode.
SBR
SBL
This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers
(FWL/FWR).
It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front wide speakers and the surround back speakers.
This surround system provides a sound field with good association between the sounds of the different channels.
[A] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height)
*Default setting
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH)
FHR
[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection
FHL
! Speaker System setting: Speaker B
R
L
SW 1
SR
C
SW 2
R
L
SBR
R
SL
SW 1
L
SR
SBL
C
SW 2
SL
SBR
A 7.2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right
front height speakers (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back
speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/SW 2).
Speaker B
SBL
It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the surround back
speakers.
This surround system produces a more true-to-life sound from above.
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.2-channel surround sound
in the main zone when not using the B speakers.
17
03
Connecting your equipment
[D] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality
surround)
! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
Placing the speakers
Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.
SW2 SW1
FHL
L
FHR
R
C
Front Bi-Amp
30 30
FWL
SL
FWR
SR
R
60
60
L
SW 1
C
120
120
SW 2
60
SR
SBL
SB
SBR
SL
! Place the surround speakers at 120º from the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t
use the front height speakers / front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside
you.
! If you intend to connect only one surround back speaker, place it directly behind you.
! Place the left and right front height speakers at least one meter (3.3 ft.) directly above the left and right front
speakers.
[E] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)
! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)
Some tips for improving sound quality
Main zone
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines
should help you to get the best sound from your system.
R
ZONE 2
Sub zone
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re
listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a
wall is not recommended.
! For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from the TV.
! If you’re going to place speakers around your CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a suffi-
cient distance from your CRT TV.
L
SW 1
C
SW 2
R
L
SR
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower
angle.
SL
! Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV
screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left
and right speakers.
! It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use
less of an angle for bigger rooms.
Other speaker connections
! Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 speakers (except front left/
right speakers).
! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front
channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could
be damaged.)
! After connecting, be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34.
! Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than your
ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers
should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.
! Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speak-
ers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.
18
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match
these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.
Installing your speaker system
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should
always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be con-
nected to the left surround back terminal).
This unit supports speakers with a nominal impedance of 6 W to 16 W.
Standard surround connection
The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.
Front height setting
CAUTION
! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when con-
necting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated
parts.
! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any
of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Front height right
Front height left
Front wide setting
Speaker B setting
Front wide right
Speaker B - right
Front wide left
Speaker B - left
Bare wire connections
CAUTION
Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk
of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as
earthquakes.
Front right
Subwoofer 1
Center
Subwoofer 2
Front left
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
1
2
3
Twist exposed wire strands together.
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
Tighten terminal.
PRE OUT
SUB
W1OOFER
1
2
3
2
10 mm (3/8 in.)
FRONT
A
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FRONT HEIGHT /WIDE /
B
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
PRE OUT
SUB
W1OOFER
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
R
B
A
CK
/ ZONE
2
FRONT HEIGHT
R
/
WIDE
L
/
B
A
(Single)
R
L
R
L
L
Note
SPEAKERS
! Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the
speaker cables to your speakers.
! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this
case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
The surround back terminals can also be used for ZONE 2.
5.2 ch surround setting
Not connected
Not connected
Banana plug connections
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug
the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.
6.2 ch surround setting
7.2 ch surround setting
Not connected
Surround back
Surround right
Surround left
Surround back right
Surround back left
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Right
ZONE 2 - Left
19
03
Connecting your equipment
Bi-amping your speakers
Bi-wiring your speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate termi-
nals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping.
! With these connections, the Speaker System setting makes no difference.
Front right
Front left
CAUTION
! Don’t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way.
! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-amping shown above.
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
High
High
%
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Using a banana plug for the second connection is recommended.
Low
Low
Subwoofer 1
Center
Subwoofer 2
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
PRE OUT
SUB
W1OOFER
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FRONT HEIGHT /WIDE /
B
A
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
PRE OUT
SUB
W1OOFER
2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
R
B
A
CK
/ ZONE
2
FRONT HEIGHT
R
/
WIDE
L
/
B
A
(Single)
R
L
R
L
L
SPEAKERS
Surround right
Surround left
CAUTION
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low
terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the
amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.
! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing so
may damage your speakers.
20
03
Connecting your equipment
Selecting the Speaker system
About the audio connection
The front height terminals can be used for front wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to for the front
height speakers. Also, the surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping and ZONE 2 connections, in addi-
tion to for the surround back speakers. Make this setting according to the application.
Types of cables and terminals
Transferable audio signals
HDMI
HD audio
Front height setup
*Default setting
Digital (Coaxial)
Digital (Optical)
Conventional digital audio
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 19.
2
If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’ from the Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 81 to do this.
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
Conventional analog audio
Front wide setup
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 19.
2
Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the Speaker System menu.
! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.
See Speaker system setting on page 81 to do this.
Speaker B setup
You can listen to stereo playback in another room.
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 19.
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 81 to do this.
Bi-Amping setup
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.
1
Connect bi-amp compatible speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals.
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 20.
2
Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 81 to do this.
ZONE 2 setup
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo
playback on another component in ZONE 2.
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.
See Standard surround connection on page 19.
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu.
See Speaker system setting on page 81 to do this.
21
03
Connecting your equipment
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through the HDMI OUT terminal.
If the TV is only connected to the receiver’s composite VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, all the other video devices
must be connected through composite connections.
If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 36), the
converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).
About HDMI
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections.
! Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))
! 3D signal transfer
! Deep Color signal transfer
! x.v.Color signal transfer
! ARC (Audio Return Channel)
! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels
! Input of the following digital audio formats:
—Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD
! Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI func-
tion on page 55)
Terminal for connection
with source device
Terminal for connection
with TV monitor
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
Note
Video signals
can be output
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO IN
! An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High
Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult
your local audio dealer for more information.
Note
! If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on
the front panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis-
played, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
! Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal
transfers.
! The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV
to the receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this video source.
! If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis-
play. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In
this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 61) OFF.
! The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are
480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.
! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage
of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corre-
sponding format.
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is used, it may not
work properly.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.
! Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.
! HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the
audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.
! Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/con-
necting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
“x.v.Color” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
22
03
Connecting your equipment
! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see Connecting your DVD
player with no HDMI output on page 24).
Connecting your TV and playback components
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables.
—When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so
there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on
page 56).
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it
to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI
functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 55).
—If you use a coaxial digital audio cable or RCA (analog) audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digi-
tal or analog audio input you connected the TV to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).
This connection is required in
order to listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray Disc player
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
HDMI/DVI-compatible
monitor
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
Select one
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL
ANALOG
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
-
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
(
)
(
)
(
)
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD CBL
L
IN
(10/100)
OPTICAL
DC OUTPUT
ASSIGN-
ABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN
HDMI
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
6
(
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
(DVD)
(SAT/CBL) (DVR/BDR)
OUTPUT
5
V
0
.
6
M
A
X
)
(TV) (DVR/BDR) (DVD) (SAT/CBL)
A
R
1
L
ANALOG IN
IN
R
(
)
CD
ASSIGNABLE
ANALOG IN
1
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
23
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no
HDMI output) to the receiver.
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to
the receiver.
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
Important
DVD player, etc.
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI
cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and
player.
! Also, when the receiver and TV are connected by anything other than an HDMI cable, the OSD function allow-
ing display of the receiver’s settings, operations, etc., on the TV’s screen cannot be used. In this case, watch
the receiver’s front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
Select one
Select one
DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDMI IN
OPTICAL COAXIAL
R
L
ANALOG
PB
PR
Y
DVD player, etc.
TV
Select one
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Select one
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
Select one
DIGITAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
HDMI OUT
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
R
L
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
ANALOG
OPTICAL COAXIAL
HDMI
PB
PR
Y
Y
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
-
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
DVD IN
IN
1
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
DVD
ASSIGNABLE
Y
PB
PR
(10/100)
OPTICAL
DC OUTPUT
ASSIGN-
ABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN
HDMI
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
6
(
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
(DVD)
(SAT/CBL) (DVR/BDR)
OUTPUT
5
V
COMPONENT VIDEO
0
.
6
M
A
X
)
(TV) (DVR/BDR) (DVD) (SAT/CBL)
A
-
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
DVD IN
VIDEO
IN
1
(DVD)
ASSIGNABLE
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD IN
IN
1
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables
(page 23).
—When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio
Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so
there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on
page 56).
(
)
DVD
ASSIGNABLE
IN
2
(10/100)
OPTICAL
DC OUTPUT
ASSIGN-
ABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN
HDMI
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
6
(
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
(DVD)
(SAT/CBL) (DVR/BDR)
OUTPUT
0.6
5
V
)
(
DVR/
(TV) (DVR/BDR) (DVD) (SAT/CBL)
A
MAX
VIDEO
BDR)
MONITOR
OUT
DVD IN
IN
1
(DVD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN
2
(DVR/
BDR)
MONITO
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
CONVI
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the
player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).
24
03
Connecting your equipment
! In order to listening to HD audio with this receiver, connect an HDMI cable, and use analog video cable for
video signal input.
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video
sources
This receiver has audio/video inputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD
recorders and BD recorders.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also
The Input Setup menu on page 36).
Depending on the player, it may not be possible to output video signals to both HDMI and other video output
(composite, etc.) simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make video output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio cables
(page 23).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the
player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).
HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.
Select one
AUDIO IN
ANALOG
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
R
L
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL
ANALOG
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
-
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
OUT
IN
DVR/BDR
L
L
OUT
R
IN
R
ASSIGN-
ABLE
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN
(10/100)
OPTICAL
DC OUTPUT
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
1
-
6
(
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
(DVD)
(SAT/CBL) (DVR/BDR)
OUTPUT
5
V
0
.
6
A
M
A
X
)
(TV) (DVR/BDR) (DVD) (SAT/CBL)
D
VR/BDR
OUT
IN
DVR/BDR
L
OUT
R
L
IN
R
! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only) (page
64).
25
03
Connecting your equipment
! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend con-
necting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by
HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 23).
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The
Input Setup menu on page 36).
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.
HDMI OUT
STB
HDMI IN
1
2
3
4
6
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
Select one
ASSIGNABLE
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
-
1
6
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL
ANALOG
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN
(10/100)
OPTICAL
DC OUTPUT
ASSIGN-
ABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN
HDMI
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
1
6
(
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
(DVD)
(SAT/CBL) (DVR/BDR)
OUTPUT
5
V
0
.
6
M
A
X
)
(TV) (DVR/BDR) (DVD) (SAT/CBL)
A
VIDEO
SAT/
CBL
IN
SAT/CBL
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
-
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
VIDEO
SAT/
CBL
IN
SAT/CBL
26
03
Connecting your equipment
! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the receiver’s
HDMI SAT/CBL IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using
HDMI on page 23).
Connecting other audio components
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see
also The Input Setup menu on page 36).
STB
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
HDMI OUT
CD player, etc.
HDMI IN
1
2
3
4
6
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
Select one
ASSIGNABLE
AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
-
1
6
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL
ANALOG
! Even if your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, in some cases the sound is output from
the digital audio output (optical or coaxial) and only the video is output from the HDMI output terminal. In this
case, make the HDMI and digital audio connections as shown below.
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
DIGITAL OUT
STB
OPTICAL COAXIAL
HDMI OUT
ASSIGNABLE
-
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
ASSIGN-
1
2
3
4
6
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
IN
IN
IN
BD IN
IN
IN
OUT
HDMI
ABLE
ASSIGNABLE
L
IN
ASSIGNABLE
(10/100)
OPTICAL
DC OUTPUT
ASSIGN-
ABLE
COAXIAL
ASSIGNABLE
-
HDMI
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
BD IN
IN
4
IN
6
OUT
LAN
1
6
1
2
1
2
IN
IN
IN
IN
(
)
(
)
(
)
DVD
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
forWIRELESS LAN
ASSIGNABLE
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
TV DVR/BDR
DVD SAT/CBL
1
-
6
(
IN
1
IN
2
IN
1
IN
2
(DVD)
(SAT/CBL) (DVR/BDR)
OUTPUT
5
V
0
.
6
M
A
X
)
(TV(DVR/BDR) (DVD) (SAT/CBL)
A
R
1
ANALOG IN
L
IN
(
)
CD
ASSIGNABLE
R
ANALOG IN
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
1
! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the ANALOG IN 1
(CD) inputs instead.
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
HDMI IN
27
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.
Connecting AM/FM antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,
connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas on page 28).
a
b
c
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
75 Ω coaxial cable
ANTENNA
AM LOOP
3
FM UNBAL
75
4
5
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP termi-
nals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.
FM UNBAL
75
1
2
ANTENNA
Outdoor antenna
AM LOOP
1
2
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to
secure the AM antenna wires.
FM UNBAL
75
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the
stand (fig. b).
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
4
5
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.
Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.
28
03
Connecting your equipment
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)
MULTI-ZONE setup
You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting (page 81) to use this setup.
This receiver can power up to two independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-
ZONE connections.
Different sources can be playing in two zones at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source
can also be used. The main and sub zone have independent power (the main zone power can be off while sub
zone is on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.
%
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below.
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Main zone
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK / ZONE 2 FRONT HEIGHT /WIDE /
R
B
A
(
)
Single
R
L
R
L
L
R
L
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you have the speakers for the sub zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a
separate amplifier if you are not using the speaker terminals for the sub zone (For detail, see MULTI-ZONE setup
using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 29).
L
R
SPEAKERS
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2:
Sub Zone
Input functions available
DVD, SAT/CBL, DVR/BDR, INTERNET RADIO, SiriusXM, PANDORA, MEDIA SERVER,
FAVORITES, iPod/USB, TV, CD, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT
(Outputs analog audio)
ZONE 2
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
R
B
A
CK
/ ZONE
2
FRONT HEIGHT
R
/
WIDE
L
/
B
A
(Single)
R
L
R
L
L
SPEAKERS
!
!
It is not possible to down-convert the audio input signal from the HDMI input terminals or digital input terminals (OPTICAL and
COAXIAL) and output them to ZONE 2.
When any of the INTERNET RADIO, SiriusXM, PANDORA, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES, iPod/USB or ADAPTER PORT inputs
is selected in the main zone, it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone for the sub zone. (Inputs other than
the ones listed here can be selected.)
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
%
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.
Sub zone (ZONE 2)
Main zone
AUDIO
ZONE 2
L
OUT
R
AUDIO IN
R
L
AUDIO
ZONE
2
L
OUT
R
29
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting to the network through LAN interface
Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen
to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the local network, including
your computer.
When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music
wirelessly.
! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles.
! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology
enabled devices.
(
)
LAN 10/100
! The Air Jam function cannot be used with the AS-BT100.
Internet
Modem
LAN (10/100)
ADAPTER PORT
(
OUTPUT 5 V
)
0.1 A MAX
ADAPTER PORT
(
OUTPUT
5
V
0
.
1
A
M
A
X
)
to LAN port
NAS
PC
Bluetooth® ADAPTER
LAN
3
2
1
WAN
Router
Important
LAN cable (sold separately)
! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage or faulty
to LAN port
contact.
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher).
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server func-
tion, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see Network Setup menu on page 83.
%
Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT.
! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth wireless technology device, see Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and
Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 43.
LAN terminal specifications
! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Note
! Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method
may differ depending on your Internet environment.
! When using a broadband Internet connection, a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For
more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.
30
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod
using the controls of this receiver.
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel
input
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 5 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC VIDEO
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 5 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC VIDEO
iPod/iPhone/iPad
iPod cable
(supplied)
Video camera (etc.)
Connecting to a wireless LAN
Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection. Use the separately sold
AS-WL300 for connection.
! Use only the furnished accessory connecting cable.
Tip
! Certain settings are required to use a wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300). For instructions on making these
settings, see the operating instructions included with the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300).
! An iPod/iPhone/iPad can be connected to the receiver. For details on supported models and versions of the
respective products, see Playing an iPod on page 40.
%
Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to
LAN (10/100)
DC OUTPUT
(
)
LAN 10/100
DC OUTPUT
f
orWIRELESS LAN
(
OUTPUT
5
V
0
.
6
A
M
A
X
)
the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.
! It is also possible to connect using the cable included with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view
pictures via the receiver.
forWIRELESS LAN
(
OUTPUT 5 V
0.6 A MAX
)
! For the cable connection, also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod.
! iPod recharging occurs whenever an iPod is connected to this unit. (Recharging is enabled only when the
unit’s power is turned on.)
Modem
Internet
Router
! For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an iPod on page 40.
WAN
Connecting a USB device
It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver.
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 5 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC VIDEO
DC 5V Ethernet
WPS
Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)
USB mass
storage device
%
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the
front panel of this receiver.
! This receiver does not support a USB hub.
! For instructions on playing the USB device, see Playing a USB device on page 41.
31
03
Connecting your equipment
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver.
! Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR
receiver remote sensor window.
! Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your com-
ponent to check for IR compatibility.
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger
You can connect components in your system (such as a screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch
on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function. However, you must specify which input func-
tions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup menu on page 36. Note that this will only work with compo-
nents that have a standby mode.
12V TRIGGER
INPUT
! If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote
sensor on the front panel.
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.
Closet or shelving unit
Non-Pioneer
component
12V
12V
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
(
OUTPUT 12
V
)
50 mA MAX
(
OUTPUT 12 V
)
50 mA MAX
IR
IN
IR
%
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on page 36.
IN
OUT
Plugging in the receiver
IR
IN
OUT
Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.
IR receiver
CAUTION
! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the
unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a
knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be
stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once
in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a
replacement.
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver
to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.
! Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit.
! Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below.
! The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use,
e.g., when on vacation.
! Make sure the blue u STANDBY/ON light has gone out before unplugging.
1
2
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
Plug the other end into a power outlet.
! After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins.
You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks
during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the Control
with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see Control
with HDMI function on page 55.
32
Basic Setup
Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)...............................................................34
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)....................................34
The Input Setup menu...................................................................................................................36
Operation Mode Setup .................................................................................................................37
About the Home Menu .................................................................................................................37
33
04
Basic Setup
Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto
MCACC)
The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After
you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test
tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room.
The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed.
! The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.
! The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV’s HDMI input are con-
nected with an HDMI cable. If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable, watch the front
panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO
jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).
Important
! Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.
! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.
! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the headphones should be disconnected.
! The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV’s HDMI input are con-
nected with an HDMI cable. If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable, watch the front
panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
2
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
3
4
5
6
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.
Select the desired language.
CAUTION
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.
! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
THX®
! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd. which is registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 5 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC VIDEO
Microphone
Tripod
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If
you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.
Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make
accurate measurement impossible:
! Sofas or other soft surfaces.
! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.
34
04
Basic Setup
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem
with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker con-
nections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to
change the setting and continue.
! If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the
phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are
properly connected.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.
— If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
(
)
Speaker System
EQ Type
: Normal SB/FH
SYMMETRY
:
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
THX Speaker
:
NO
START
Exit
Return
! If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
3
Select the parameters you want to set.
! When data measurement is taken, the reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this
receiver had been storing will be overwritten.
! When measurement is taken of the reverb characteristics data other than SYMMETRY, the data are not
measured after the correction. If you will need to measure after correcting data, take the measurement using
the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (page 75).
If the speakers are connected using any setup other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set Speaker System before
the Full Auto MCACC Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 81.
! Speaker System – Shows the current settings. When this is selected and ENTER is pressed, the speaker
system selection screen appears. Select the proper speaker system, then press RETURN to return.
If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another
room, read through Speaker system setting on page 81 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary
before continuing to step 4.
— If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum
receiver settings.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
8
The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears
automatically.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup.
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system,
but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The Advanced MCACC menu on page 72 or The
System Setup and Other Setup menus on page 80.
! Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12
cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual
speaker setup on page 81.
! The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This set-
ting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to
be changed.
! EQ Type – This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted. Normally select SYMMETRY. For details,
see Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73.
! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening posi-
tions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 78).
! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX speakers (all speakers other than the front speakers are set to
SMALL). In other cases, leave at NO.
! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and view-
ing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
4
5
Press
then select START.
Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a
comfortable volume level.
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for
household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them
off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them.
! Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off
the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
6
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present
in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press
ENTER in step 7.
! With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after check-
ing for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 35) and verifying the mic
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Now Analyzing...
2/9
FHL
C
FHR
R
Environment Check
Ambient Noise
Microphone
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
:
:
:
OK
Speaker YES/NO
SW
10
OK
RETRY
Exit
Cancel
Exit
Cancel
35
04
Basic Setup
Input function default and possible settings
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have con-
nected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup
menu on page 36 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible assignments.
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according
to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 36). In this case, you need to tell
the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to
the components you’ve connected.
Input Terminals
Input function
! The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV’s HDMI input are con-
nected with an HDMI cable. If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable, watch the front
panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
HDMI
Audio
Component
BD
(BD)
DVD
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
COAX-1
COAX-2
OPT-2
IN 1
k
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
SAT/CBL
DVR/BDR
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
IN 2
2
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.
HDMI 4
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
HDMI 5
(front panel)
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
HDMI 6
INTERNET RADIO
SiriusXM
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
Input
:
:
:
DVD
Rename
OFF
Input Name
Input Skip
c. OSD Language
d. Network Setup
e. HDMI Setup
Audio In
:
:
:
:
COAX-1
Input-1
In-1
HDMI Input
Component In
12V Trigger
f. Other Setup
OFF
PANDORA
MEDIA SERVER
FAVORITES
iPod/USB
Exit
Return
Exit
Return
4
Select the input function that you want to set up.
The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or SAT/CBL
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.
TV
OPT-1
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s
Audio In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to
OPT-2) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.
ANALOG-1
<a>
CD
TUNER
6
When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.
ADAPTER PORT
There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:
! Input Name – You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so,
or Default to return to the system default.
a
Only the TV and CD inputs can be assigned to ANALOG-1.
! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD and
other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)
! 12V Trigger – After connecting a component to the 12 volt trigger (see Switching components on and off
using the 12 volt trigger on page 32), select MAIN, ZONE 2 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to
switch it on automatically along with the (main or sub) zone specified.
7
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
36
04
Basic Setup
Operable functions/items
Descriptions
Page
Operation Mode Setup
PHASE (Phase Control)
Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected.
48
This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided
for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.
One of two settings can be selected for the Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.
! The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV’s HDMI input are con-
nected with an HDMI cable. If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable, watch the front
panel display while performing the various operations and making settings.
iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT
CONTROL
Switches the input to iPod/USB and sets the mode allowing operation
from the iPod.
40
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Home Menu.
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
About the Home Menu
This receiver’s Home Menu (HOME MENU) can be used to make various settings and to check and adjust items
that have been set.
To display the Home Menu screen, press
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
2
3
Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from the Home Menu.
Select the Operation Mode setting you want.
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
! Expert (default) – Users can set all the functions by themselves.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
! Basic – The number of operable functions is restricted, and functions whose operations are restricted are
automatically set to achieve the Pioneer-recommended sound and picture quality. The functions that can be
operated are shown below. They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions.
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup
5. Network Information
6. Operation Mode Setup
Operable functions/items
HOME MENU
Descriptions
Page
Exit
Return
Full Auto MCACC
Input Name
Makes high precision sound field settings easily.
Input names can be changed as desired for easier use.
Inputs not being used are skipped (not displayed).
Updates to the latest version of the software.
Checks the receiver’s IP address.
34
36
36
85
84
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
The top level in the Home Menu is as shown below. Refer to the respective explanations to set, check and adjust
as necessary.
! Advanced MCACC – Use this to make automatic settings and detailed manual settings for the surround
sound. For details, see Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 73.
! MCACC Data Check – Use this to check the MCACC memory. For details, see Checking MCACC Data on page
77.
! Data Management – Use this to manage the data in the MCACC memory. For details, see Data Management
on page 78.
! System Setup – Use this to make various settings related to this system. For details, see Making receiver set-
tings from the System Setup menu on page 81.
Input Skip
Software Update
Network Information
Audio Parameters
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory.
Adjusts the delay time of the overall sound.
Plays compressed sound with high sound quality.
Dual monaural audio setting.
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
S.RTRV
(Auto Sound Retriever)
! Network Information – The setting status of the network-related items can be checked. For detail, see
Checking the Network Information on page 84.
! Operation Mode Setup – Use this to select this receiver’s operation mode. For details, see Operation Mode
Setup on page 37.
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
V.SB
Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback.
Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback.
Creates a virtual wide channel sound for playback.
Plays with a sound field suited for 3D images.
(Virtual Surround Back)
V.HEIGHT
(Virtual Height)
V.WIDE
(Virtual Wide)
V.DEPTH
(Virtual Depth)
Other functions
INPUT SELECT (INPUT SELECTOR)
VOLUME +/–, MUTE
LISTENING MODE
PQLS
Switches the input.
39
39
45
57
Use to set the listening volume.
Only Pioneer-recommended modes can be selected.
Plays using the PQLS function.
37
Basic playback
Playing a source.............................................................................................................................39
Playing an iPod ..............................................................................................................................40
Playing a USB device .....................................................................................................................41
Listening to the radio....................................................................................................................42
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music ..............................................................43
38
05
Basic playback
Turning off the sound
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.
%
Press MUTE.
RECEIVER
Playing a source with HDMI connection
BDR
%
Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input
BD
TV
DVD
CD
DVR
HDMI
ADPT
terminals.
You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.
! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 59 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio
output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).
! If the video signal does not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis-
play. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In
this case, use an analog video connection.
NET
USB
CBL
SAT
AUTO/ALC
DIRECT
iPod
TUNER
INPUT SELECT
LISTENING MODE
VOLUME
RECEIVER
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have
one), then the receiver (press u RECEIVER).
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2
Select the input function you want to play.
You can use the input function buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel
INPUT SELECTOR dial.
! If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 47).
3
Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’
and start playback of the source.
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound source, you should hear surround sound. If you are play-
ing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.
! You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It
should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an
MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
! See also Listening to your system on page 45 for information on different ways of listening to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed prop-
erly. For details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 98.
When using surround speakers, 2DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS
is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.
4
Use the VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.
Note
! It will take about 1 minute to be able to use the NETWORK (internet radio and such), iPod/USB, or ADAPTOR
PORT from the time the power is turned on.
! The playback operation can be performed on the OSD screen for certain inputs, but the OSD screen is only
displayed when the receiver and TV are connected with an HDMI cable. If the receiver and TV are connected
with anything other than an HDMI cable, perform the various operations while watching the front panel.
39
05
Basic playback
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod
Playing an iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.
You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver.
! Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
! This feature is not available for photos on your iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see
Switching the iPod controls on page 40).
This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from
your iPod using the controls of this receiver.
Here we describe the procedure for playback on an iPod. For playback on a USB device, see Playing a USB device
on page 41.
Important
Finding what you want to play
! This receiver is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano 3G/4G/5G/6G (audio only for the iPod
nano 6G), iPod touch 1G/2G/3G/4G, iPhone, iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, iPhone 4S, iPad and iPad 2.
However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The receiver is not compatible with the
iPod shuffle.
! This receiver has been developed and tested for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad indicated on the
website of Pioneer (http://pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/na/).
! Installing software versions other than indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone/iPad may result
in incompatibility with this receiver.
! iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is
legally permitted to reproduce.
! Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the
equalizer off before connecting.
! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.
! When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to
a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.
1
Use i/j to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.
! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
2
Use i/j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).
! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start
playback.
Note
! You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list.
For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.
Basic playback controls
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod.
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.
See Connecting an iPod on page 31.
About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see
Switching the iPod controls on page 40.
DISP
TOP MENU
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
ENTER
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.
When the display shows the names of folders and files, you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
RETURN
Switching the iPod controls
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver.
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become
inactive.
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls.
Note
! Change the receiver’s input to the iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL
button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.
40
05
Basic playback
Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device
! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
Playing a USB device
It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver.
! Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key
drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and
assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
1
Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.
! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
2
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press ENTER to start
playback.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.
The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts.
See Connecting a USB device on page 31.
About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
! Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
Basic playback controls
Button(s)
ENTER, d
g
What it does
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.
Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected. When the dis-
play shows the names of folders and files, you’re ready to play from the USB device.
Note
Tip
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this
receiver. Try following the points below:
! Switch the receiver off, then on again.
! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.
! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.
! Slideshows of photo files can be played while listening to music files by returning to the folder/file list display
while playing a music file on a USB device then playing the photo files.
Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 9.
! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
1
Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.
! To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.
2
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start
playback.
! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
Basic playback controls
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.
DISP
TOP MENU
ENTER
RETURN
41
05
Basic playback
About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available
for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see Saving station
presets on page 42 for more on how to do this.
Music files
Category
Extension
Stream
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
1
2
3
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.
Tune to a station.
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
16 bit
MP3
<a>
.mp3
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3
2 ch
There are three ways to do this:
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
! Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE +/– for about
a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to
search for other stations.
! Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step at a time, press TUNE +/–.
! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– for high speed tuning. Release the button at the frequency
you want.
VBR/CBR
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Sampling frequency
WAV
.wav
LPCM
Quantization bitrate
Channel
16 bit, 24 bit
2 ch
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
16 bit
Improving FM sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to
enjoy the broadcast.
WMA2/7/8/9
<b>
WMA
.wma
2 ch
Bitrate
5 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
16 bit
VBR/CBR
Tuning directly to a station
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
.m4a <c>
.aac
.3gp
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
(aacPlus v1/2)
1
2
3
4
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
AAC
2 ch
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
Bitrate
16 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
.3g2
VBR/CBR
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.
Sampling frequency
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over.
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
Quantization bitrate
Channel
16 bit, 24 bit
2 ch
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy
recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.
a
b
“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifi-
cally, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
Apple lossless encoding is not supported.
c
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 42 for more on this.
Photo files
2
Press TOOLS (TUNER EDIT).
Category
Extension
Format
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.
Meeting the following conditions:
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET +/– to select the station
JPEG
.jpg
!
!
Baseline JPEG format
Y:Cb:Cr – 4:2:2
preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.
4
Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.
42
05
Basic playback
Listening to station presets
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.
Device not equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology:
Digital music player
+
Bluetooth audio transmitter
(sold commercially)
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
3
Press PRESET +/– to select the station preset you want.
Bluetooth wireless
technology enabled device:
cell phone
Bluetooth wireless
technology enabled device:
Digital music player
! You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your station presets.
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.
See Listening to station presets on page 43 for how to do this.
2
Press TOOLS (TUNER EDIT).
Music data
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.
®
Bluetooth
ADAPTER
3
Input the name you want.
This receiver
Use TUNE +/– (or TUNE i/j of front panel) to select a character, PRESET +/– (or PRESET k/l of front panel) to
set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Remote control
operation
Note
! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.
! Once you have named a station preset, you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display
between name and frequency.
! About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
Wireless music play
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wire-
lessly. Also, by using a commercially available transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, you can
listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models
supports SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type
Bluetooth wireless technology.
! The Air Jam function cannot be used with the AS-BT100.
Remote control operation
The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations.
! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles.
! Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.
Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device
“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth
ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared.
The pairing step is necessary to register the Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communi-
cations. For more details, see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless
technology device.
43
05
Basic playback
! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s security code is “0000”, there is no need to make the security code
setting on the receiver. Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on
the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing
operation below.
! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit complies with Bluetooth Specifications Ver. 2.1. When this unit and
another device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver. 2.1,
pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password.
In this case, a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with Bluetooth wire-
less technology. If this happens, check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, then press ENTER. After this, also perform the connection
operation on the Bluetooth device to be connected. If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the
Bluetooth device to be connected, press RETURN to cancel pairing, then try starting over.
Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless
technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.
! Pair one unit at a time.
! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth connections with a device equipped with the Bluetooth function to
listen to music, do not connect any devices other than this receiver by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth-
equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver, discon-
nect the other device before connecting this receiver.
Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with
your system
1
Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.
! The ADAPTER PORT input can also be selected by pressing SOUND RETRIEVER AIR on the receiver. In this
case, the optimum listening mode (SOUND RETRIEVER AIR) is selected automatically.
2
From the Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operation to connect to the
Bluetooth ADAPTER.
! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged into the ADAPTER PORT, No Adapter will be displayed if
ADAPTER PORT input is selected.
3
Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology devices.
! Bluetooth wireless technology device should be compatible with AVRCP profile.
! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in
the remote control buttons.
1
2
3
4
Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.
Press TOP MENU to select Bluetooth Setup.
Use i/j to select ‘PIN’ then press ENTER.
Use i/j to select one of PIN codes 0000, 1234 or 8888, then press ENTER.
You can use any of 0000, 1234 or 8888 PIN codes. Bluetooth wireless technology device using any other PIN
code cannot be used with this receiver.
4
While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then
5
Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair, place it
near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.
Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology
press ADV SURR repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
6
device.
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected:
Air Jam
Bluetooth wireless technology device name appears in the receiver display.
! The system can display alphanumeric characters only. Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not connected:
No Device appears in the receiver display. In this case, perform the connection operation from the side of the
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
Air Jam - a Pioneer-exclusive application and available for free.
Air Jam lets you connect multi compatible devices to this unit using Bluetooth wireless technology. With it, you
can make a group playlist directly on a supported device to play in your home theater through the unit. You and
your friends can add songs from your devices to the playlist. Also Air Jam lets you delete the song before anyone
has to hear it.
7
From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter
the PIN code selected in step 4.
! The PIN code may in some cases be referred to as PASSKEY.
1
2
3
4
Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.
Press TOP MENU to select Bluetooth Setup.
Use i/j to select ‘Air Jam’ then press ENTER.
Use i/j to select ‘Air Jam ON’ then press ENTER.
For more details of using Air Jam, access to our website.
http://pioneer.jp/product/soft/iapp_airjam/en.html
44
Listening to your system
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes ................................................46
Selecting MCACC presets..............................................................................................................47
Choosing the input signal.............................................................................................................47
Better sound using Phase Control................................................................................................48
45
06
Listening to your system
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front wide), especially suited to music sources
! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to movie sources
! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to music sources
! STEREO – The audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options.
With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers, you can select
(according to format):
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend
on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.
To play with surround sound, check “Standard surround sound” or “Using the Advanced surround effects” below
and select the desired mode.
To play with the optimum mode for the input signal, see “Auto playback” or “Using Stream Direct”. (The sound is
played in stereo when 2-channel signals are input, in surround when multi-channel signals are input.)
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding
for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources
! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above
! STEREO – See above
Important
! The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the cur-
rent source, settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
! Straight Decode – Plays back without the effects above.
%
While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for
Note
auto playback of a source.
! When listening sources in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting
the Audio options on page 59).
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digi-
tal format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically
be selected and shows in the display.
! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically.
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the vol-
ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at
night.
! When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters
you can adjust: C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 59 to adjust
them.
! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center
image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 59).
! The stereo mode can also be selected by pressing the STEREO button on the remote control.
! When listening through headphones, you can select STEREO mode only.
Using the Advanced surround effects
Note
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced
Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.
! When ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio
options on page 59.
%
Press ADV SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.
! ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks
! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.
%
While listening to a source, press STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.
! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects
! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks
! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field
! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources
! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically
be selected and shows in the display.
! If the surround back speakers are not connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel
sound).
With two channel sources, you can select from:
! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to movie sources
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to music sources
! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound (surround back), especially suited to video games
! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front height)
! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound
! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music
! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources
! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers
! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left
and right speakers sound projection area converges.
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound (front wide), especially suited to movie sources
46
06
Listening to your system
! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.
Selecting MCACC presets
! Default setting: MEMORY 1
FOCUS position
WIDE position
(Recommended)
If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a
video game close to the TV).
Front left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Front right
speaker
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode.
While listening to a source, press MCACC.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See Data Management on page 78 to check and man-
age your current settings.
! These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
! You can also press k/l to select the MCACC preset.
! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The
SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the ADAPTER PORT input.
! PHONES SURR – When listening through headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.
Choosing the input signal
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below.
! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96/24) digital
signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192
kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.
! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal.
To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 21) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with
your DVD player.
Note
! When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT
parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 59.
However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS, F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR, the effect level cannot be
adjusted.
! The Front Stage Surround Advance (F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE) function allows you to create natu-
ral surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode.
Using Stream Direct
Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unneces-
sary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source.
Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected. For
details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 98.
Each press cycles through the options as follows:
! AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.
! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.
%
While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
select the mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.
! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 46.
! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 46).
! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT,
the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC sys-
tem and the Phase Control effect.
— When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not
from this receiver.
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the
signal being decoded (see Display on page 13).
! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment.
Note
! When listening through headphones, you can select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only.
47
06
Listening to your system
Better sound using Phase Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at
the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an opti-
mal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound
sources.
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode.
Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.
Note
! Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in
phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound
signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image
will be produced.
! For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the
first place. Phase Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs. For instructions on setting
the Phase Control Plus, see Setting the Audio options on page 59.
! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can
actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set
your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of
your subwoofer.
! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the
cutoff frequency to a higher value.
! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
—When headphones are plugged in.
—When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
—When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page
59.
48
Playback with NETWORK features
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................50
Playback with Network functions................................................................................................51
About network playback..............................................................................................................52
About playable file formats..........................................................................................................54
49
07
Playback with NETWORK features
Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes
AirPlay works with iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPod touch (4th, 3rd and 2nd generations), iPad 2, iPad with
iOS 4.2 or later, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.
To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1
The receiver’s input will switch automatically to AirPlay when AirPlay is in use. *2
The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode:
! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.
! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the receiver.
! Display of the currently playing track information on the receiver’s display, including artist, song and album
name.
Introduction
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your
components to these terminals.
Listening to Internet radio stations
You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created,
edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products.
dSee Playback with Network functions on page 51 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 51.
Playback the music files stored in PCs
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit.
! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media
server function based on DLNA 1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and
audio systems).
*1: For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).
*2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON.
dSee Playback with Network functions on page 51 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the
network on page 52.
Note
! A network environment is required to use AirPlay.
! The receiver’s name that shows up in the AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and iTunes can be changed by
Friendly Name from Network Setup.
! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod,
iPhone, iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not
be compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer
website.
Listening to SiriusXM or Pandora
dSee Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio on page 52.
dSee Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 52.
Note
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.
! Photo or video files cannot be played back.
! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on
this receiver.
About the DHCP server function
To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn
on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function,
it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components
on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup menu on page 83 for more on this.
About playable DLNA network devices
This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the
receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices:
! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed
! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with Windows Media Player 12 installed
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)
Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media Server) as described above can be played via command from an exter-
nal Digital Media Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital Media
Renderers). This receiver supports this DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and
stopping files can be performed from the external controller. Volume adjustment and the muting control are also
possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from
certain buttons, including the VOLUME +/–, MUTE and DISP).
Authorizing this receiver
This receiver must be authorized to enable playback. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a
connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization
(or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more
information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.
! Depending on the external controller being used, playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted
from the controller. In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control.
50
07
Playback with NETWORK features
Listening to Internet radio stations
Playback with Network functions
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet
radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed,
and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations
or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the
range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from
anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through
the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre
as well as by region.
Important
! About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup.
! When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue
for several seconds depending on the type of file.
! In case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network
while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.
! There are cases where the time elapsed may not be correctly displayed.
Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select the category you want to play back.
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network.
Select a category from the following list:
! INTERNET RADIO – Internet radio
! SiriusXM – Internet radio that supports SiriusXM
About list of Internet radio
The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service
exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 102.
Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations
! PANDORA – Internet radio that supports Pandora
! MEDIA SERVER – Server components on the network
! FAVORITES – Favorite songs currently being registered
Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Playing back your favorite songs on page 52 for
more on this.
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN
modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.
! The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.
! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without
notice due to various reasons.
! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot
listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.
2
Use i/j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then
press ENTER.
Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts
with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN.
When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no
operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed.
Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j and ENTER to
select the desired folder and audio files.
Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site
With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered
and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the
special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the
special Pioneer Internet radio site is:
3
Repeat step 2 to play back the desired song.
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.
! Internet radio stations – See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 51.
! SiriusXM – See Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio on page 52.
! Pandora – See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 52.
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
! Media server – See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 52.
! Favorites – See Playing back your favorite songs on page 52.
1
Display the Internet Radio list screen.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform step 1 at Playback with Network functions on page 51.
2
3
Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.
Basic playback controls
You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not
available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.
Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.
The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of
this address.
The following can be checked on the Help screen:
! Press NET to switch the remote control to the network operation mode.
! Get access code – The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is
displayed.
! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and
password are displayed.
! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.
When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations,
re-register after resetting.
+Favorite
TOP MENU
TOOLS
DISP
ENTER
RETURN
/
CLR
51
07
Playback with NETWORK features
4
Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the
Playing back your favorite songs
Up to 64 favorite tracks on the media server and/or Internet radio stations can be registered in the Favorites
folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.
registration process.
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions
on the screen.
Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the
Favorites folder
5
Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the
computer’s screen.
1
2
Press NET repeatedly to select the INTERNET RADIO or MEDIA SERVER.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they
are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.
With the track or Internet radio station you want to register selected, press +Favorite.
The selected song or Internet radio station is then registered in the Favorite.
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
Check the website below to listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio: http://www.siriusxm.com/internetradio
! You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Select SiriusXM, then follow the instructions on the screen to make the account settings.
! If you want to check or change an account that has already been registered, press the TOOLS button on the
SiriusXM top page and display the account input screen, then check or change the account.
! Some functions may be changed at SiriusXM’s discretion.
Note
! To delete tracks or Internet radio stations that have been registered, set the input to FAVORITES, select the
track or station to be deleted, then press the CLR button.
About network playback
The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:
Note
! When disposing of the product, we recommend you reset it to delete the data. See Resetting the system on
page 64.
Windows Media Player
See Windows Media Player 11/Windows Media Player 12 on page 102 for more on this.
Listening to Pandora Internet Radio
Pandora is personalized internet radio that is designed to help you discover new music you’ll love mixed in with
music you already know.
Windows Media DRM
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management (WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver
content for playback on computers, portable devices and network devices. This unit’s functions as a WMDRM 10
for networked devices. WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM.
Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device
uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content,
content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.
Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to
access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
For details, check the website: http://www.pandora.com
! You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using Pandora Internet Radio.
Select PANDORA, then follow the instructions on the screen to make the account settings.
! As of April 2011, the Pandora service is only offered in the United States.
! Some functions may be changed at Pandora’s discretion.
Note
! When disposing of the product, we recommend you reset it to delete the data. See Resetting the system on
page 64.
Pandora®, the leading internet radio service, gives people music they love anytime, anywhere, through personalized
radio stations.
Playing back audio files stored on components on the network
This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the
receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices:
! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed
! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with Windows Media Player 12 installed
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or other components)
52
07
Playback with NETWORK features
IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IF ANY APPLICABLE AUTHORITY HOLDS ANY
PORTION OF THIS SECTION TO BE UNENFORCEABLE, THEN LIABILITY WILL BE LIMITED TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
DLNA
About playback behavior over a network
! Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.
! If there are problems within the network environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed
or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-TX connection
between player and PC is recommended.
! If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.
! Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software, network
connection may be blocked.
DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, comput-
ing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media
through a wired or wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines.
This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5.
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the NETWORK features due to communica-
tion error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment.
Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some
setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the
software or device for more information.
“Windows MediaTM” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a
license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital
Living Network Alliance.
Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP, Windows®2000, Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98,
and WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.
Content playable over a network
! Even when encoded in a compatible format, some files may not play correctly.
! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
! There are cases where you cannot listen to an Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a
list of radio stations.
! Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used.
! Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit.
For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.
Disclaimer for Third Party Content
ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES, INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED FEATURES AND
FUNCTIONALITIES, IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” “AS AVAILABLE” AND AT THE USER’S OWN RISK, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PIONEER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN CONNECTION
WITH ACCESS TO AND USE OF CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. PIONEER DOES NOT GUARANTEE, REPRESENT, OR WARRANT
THAT CONTENT SERVICES WILL BE FREE FROM ERRORS, INTERRUPTION, LOSS, CORRUPTION, ATTACK,
VIRUSES, INTERFERENCE, HACKING, OR OTHER SECURITY INTRUSION, AND PIONEER DISCLAIMS ANY
LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE FOREGOING. PIONEER IS NOT LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY
LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING FROM ACCESS TO OR USE OF CONTENT. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION
OR ADVICE GIVEN BY PIONEER OR ITS CUSTOMER SERVICES REPRESENTATIVES WILL CREATE ANY SUCH
WARRANTY.
IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER, ITS AFFILIATES, OR THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, OR EMPLOYEES
BE LIABLE IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH THIS DEVICE
FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR ATTORNEY’S FEES, LOST DATA OR LOST PROFITS,
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY LAW
IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED $10.00. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN
53
07
Playback with NETWORK features
About playable file formats
The NETWORK feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats var-
ies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported
by your server.
! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this case play-
back may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.
Music files
Category
Extension
Stream
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
16 bit
MP3
<a>
.mp3
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3
2 ch
Bitrate
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
VBR/CBR
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Sampling frequency
WAV
.wav
LPCM
Quantization bitrate
Channel
16 bit, 24 bit
2 ch
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
16 bit
WMA2/7/8/9
<b>
WMA
.wma
2 ch
Bitrate
5 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
16 bit
VBR/CBR
Sampling frequency
Quantization bitrate
Channel
.m4a
.aac
.3gp
.3g2
MPEG-4 AAC LC
MPEG-4 HE AAC
(aacPlus v1/2)
AAC
2 ch
Bitrate
16 kbps to 320 kbps
Supported/Supported
VBR/CBR
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz,
192 kHz
Sampling frequency
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
Quantization bitrate
Channel
16 bit, 24 bit
2 ch
a
b
“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifi-
cally, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
54
Control with HDMI function
About the Control with HDMI function.......................................................................................56
Making Control with HDMI connections.....................................................................................56
HDMI Setup....................................................................................................................................56
Before using synchronization.......................................................................................................56
About synchronized operations...................................................................................................57
Setting the PQLS function.............................................................................................................57
About Auto Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link..................................................57
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function.............................................................................57
55
08
Control with HDMI function
4
Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.
About the Control with HDMI function
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the
Control with HDMI function.
When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.
! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI function. Set Control Mode, ARC and PQLS in the subsequent setting
items to the desired values.
Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player are pos-
sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.
! The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-
compatible component is played.
Also, by setting this to ON, the Auto Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions can be oper-
ated automatically by connecting a player supporting the respective functions. See Setting the Audio options
on page 59 for details on Auto Sound Retriever Link, Setting the Video options on page 61 for details on
Stream Smoother Link.
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.
Important
! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled. The Control Mode, ARC and PQLS functions in the subsequent
setting items cannot be used.
! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.
! You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI.
! We only guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components. However,
we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components that support the Control with
HDMI function.
5
Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.
Choose whether you want to enable synchronized operations.
! ON – Enabled for the synchronized operations.
! OFF – The synchronized operations disabled.
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Control with
HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.
! For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each
component.
6
Select the ‘ARC’ setting you want.
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of
the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.
! ON – The TV’s sound is input via the HDMI terminal.
! OFF – The TV’s sound is input from the Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.
Making Control with HDMI connections
You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and other components.
7
Select the ‘PQLS’ setting you want.
Choose whether to set this unit’s PQLS function AUTO or OFF.
! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected
by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV
is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case,
set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON (see HDMI Setup on page 56).
For details about PQLS function, see Setting the PQLS function on page 57.
! AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing
errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface. This
is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-compatible players.
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 23.
! OFF – PQLS is disabled.
8
Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.
It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI-connected player to the TV when this receiver’s power is on standby.
Select the HDMI input whose HDMI signal is to be input for through transfer when in the standby mode. When
Last is selected, the signal being input to the currently selected HDMI input is transferred. When OFF is selected,
no HDMI input is transferred through when in the standby mode. (However, when Control is set to ON, the HDMI
signal is transferred through by the Control with HDMI function even when in the standby mode.)
! When anything other than OFF is set for this setting, the receiver’s HDMI input can be switched even when
the receiver is in the standby mode. (Switch by pointing the remote control at the receiver and pressing the
HDMI, BD, DVD, SAT/CBL or DVR/BDR button.)
Important
! When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the
power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
! After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins.
You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks
during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the Control
with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see Control with
HDMI function on page 55.
! This setting can be used even with devices that are not compatible with the Control with HDMI function.
! To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but
rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.
9
When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.
HDMI Setup
Before using synchronization
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMI-compatible compo-
nents in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instruc-
tions for each component.
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:
1
2
3
Put all components into standby mode.
Turn the power on for all components, with the power for the TV being turned on last.
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video
1
2
3
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.
Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER.
output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.
4
Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.
56
08
Control with HDMI function
%
Press
on the remote control, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.
About synchronized operations
The setting is displayed on the front panel display.
! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by
timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI inter-
face. This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-compatible players.
Important
! Synchronized operations are enabled when Control Mode is set to ON after setting Control in HDMI Setup to
ON. For details, see HDMI Setup on page 56.
! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.
The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below.
! From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver,
and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, you can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s
remote control.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is
turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the
TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.
! When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI
input or a TV program on the TV.
About Auto Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link
These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using
the Control with HDMI function. When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver
by HDMI, the sound/picture is optimized for the compressed audio/video file played on the player.
! Depending on the compressed audio/video file format, it may not be operated automatically.
Auto Sound Retriever Link
When playing a compressed audio file on the player, the file’s bitrate information is acquired using the Control
with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information.
To activate the Auto Sound Retriever Link function, make the setting below.
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces
sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.
! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a
component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)
! The receiver’s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.
! The receiver’s input switches automatically when the TV’s input is switched.
! The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other
than one connected by HDMI.
1
Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ON.
See HDMI Setup on page 56.
2
Set the S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever) setting to ON.
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.
! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted, the volume status is displayed on the TV’s
screen.
Stream Smoother Link
Using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver automatically detects whether a compressed video file is
being played on the player, and if so automatically activates the Stream Smoother function.
To activate the Stream Smoother Link function, make the setting below.
! When the OSD language is switched on the TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches accordingly.
1
Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ON.
Setting the PQLS function
See HDMI Setup on page 56.
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with
HDMI function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS
compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is
generated upon transmission.
2
Set the STREAM (Stream Smoother) setting to OFF.
See Setting the Video options on page 61.
! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream, PQLS always works for all sources.
! On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio output to
Linear PCM.
! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS only works when playing CDs.
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information.
This function is activated when Control is set to ON.
Cautions on the Control with HDMI function
! Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.
! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this
receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can
cause operational errors.
! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input in The Input Setup menu on page 36 is automatically set to OFF.
! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON, even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible
to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) and compatible
TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light.
Tip
! The PQLS setting is set at PQLS in HDMI Setup on the HOME MENU, but the setting can also be switched
with the remote control, as described below.
57
Using other functions
Setting the Audio options ............................................................................................................59
Setting the Video options.............................................................................................................61
Switching the speaker terminals..................................................................................................63
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls...................................................................................................63
Making an audio or a video recording.........................................................................................64
Using the sleep timer ....................................................................................................................64
Dimming the display .....................................................................................................................64
Checking your system settings.....................................................................................................64
Resetting the system.....................................................................................................................64
58
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting the Audio options
With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to
compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving
the sound’s sense of density and modulation.
OFF
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
S.RTRV
(Auto Sound Retriever)
<b>
Also, when a player supporting the Auto Sound Retriever Link func-
tion is connected to the receiver by HDMI, by setting this to ON, the
bitrate information of the compressed audio file being played on the
player is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the
sound is optimized based on this information (Auto Sound Retriever
Link).
ON
Important
! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, settings and status of the receiver.
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video OFF
tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.
This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.
This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48
kHz or less.
Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
DNR
(Digital Noise Reduction)
ON
3
Use k/l to set as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other
DIALOG E
(Dialog Enhancement)
<c>
c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/
UP3/UP4 d
Default: OFF
background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. By moving from UP1
through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source
seem to relocate upwards.
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs, DVDs or ON
BDs. Smoother, more delicate musical expression can be achieved by
requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit compressed audio signals to 24 bit.
This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48
kHz or less.
Audio parameter menu
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Hi-bit24
OFF
c M1. MEMORY 1 to
M6. MEMORY 6 d
Default:
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset
memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been
renamed, the given name is displayed.
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
CH1 – Channel 1 is
heard only
M1. MEMORY 1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should
be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary heard only
when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.
CH2 – Channel 2 is
EQ
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.
(Acoustic Calibration EQ)
CH1 CH2 – Both chan-
nels heard from front
speakers
S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.
For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE
channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function
corrects for phase shifting on such discs.
When AUTO is selected, the LFE channel’s delay is measured auto-
matically and the disc is played with the optimum correction.
This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes
the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-
PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.
OFF
Phase C+
(Phase Control Plus)
c AUTO/0 to 16 (ms) d
Default: AUTO
Fixed PCM
ON
AUTO
MAX
MID
OFF
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized
for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listen-
ing to surround sound at low volumes).
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a
bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of
the video.
c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d
1 second = 30 frames
(NTSC)
DRC
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
(Dynamic Range Control)
<d>
Default: 0.0
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is STEREO,
Auto surround (STEREO) or SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
BYPASS
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized
for Dolby TrueHD (you may need to use this feature when listening to
surround sound at low volumes).
This can only be set when DRC is set to OFF and the input signal is a
Dolby TrueHD signal.
ON
TONE
(Tone Control)
Loud Mgmt
(Loudness Management)
ON
OFF
BASS
<a>
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Default: 0 (dB)
Adjusts the amount of bass.
Adjusts the amount of treble.
Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenu-
ator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting
the sound from the speakers.
TREBLE
<a>
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Default: 0 (dB)
c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/
–10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited Default: 0dB
by the respective degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output
from the LFE channel.
LFE
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended
(LFE Attenuate)
59
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when
it’s too strong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator
lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound.
The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the
Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
OFF
OFF
V.DEPTH
(Virtual Depth)
<m>
When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to
behind the display, resulting in a sound field with the same depth as
the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.
MIN
MID
MAX
A.ATT
(Analog input attenuate)
ON
0dB
SACD GAIN
<e>
Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range (during
digital processing).
a
b
The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
+6dB
AMP
! When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the
USB memory audio and INTERNET RADIO, SiriusXM, PANDORA, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES (digital audio input only) to
achieve high sound quality.
! With the iPod/USB, INTERNET RADIO, SiriusXM, PANDORA, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES or ADAPTER PORT input func-
tion, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.
! When ON is selected, optimum correction of the audio signals input via the HDMI OUT terminal is conducted with the HDMI
ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, and the sound of digital TV broadcasts is produced with HD quality. This is valid when
the input is set to TV and ARC in HDMI Setup is set to ON. (See HDMI Setup on page 56.)
UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of effects depends on
the listening mode.
The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.
You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting
back to 0dB.
! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV
with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page 57.
This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’)
for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For
more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.
HDMI
(HDMI Audio)
<f>
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is
output from this receiver.
THROUGH
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between
components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time
is set depending on the operational status of the display connected
with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted
according to the audio delay time.
OFF
A.DELAY
(Auto delay)
<g>
ON
c
C.WIDTH
(Center Width)
d
e
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center
c 0 to 7 d
Default: 3
(Applicable only when using a channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound
center speaker)
<h>
wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
f
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back,
making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward
(positive settings).
DIMENSION
<h>
c –3 to +3 d
Default: 0
g
OFF
PANORAMA
<h>
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a
‘wraparound’ effect.
h
i
Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
ON
j
! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo,
Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front
Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is selected at Speaker System and
SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button.
C.IMAGE
(Center Image)
c 0 to 10 d
Defaults:
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals.
(Applicable only when using a Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left
center speaker)
<i>
speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).
! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front
Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It can also not be
used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.
! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
! You can’t use the Virtual Wide mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front
Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
! You can only use the Virtual Wide mode if the surround speakers are on and the FW setting is set to NO. It can also not be
used when playing signals containing actual front wide channel information.
c 10 to 90 d
Defaults:
EXT.STEREO: 90
Others: 50
k
l
Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround or
ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).
EFFECT
LOW
MID
HIGH
OFF
Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in 2
Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH, the sound from the top
will be more emphasized.
H.GAIN
(Height Gain)
When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode
allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your sur-
round speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround
back channel information.
V.SB
! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
(Virtual Surround Back)
<j>
ON
m ! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
! You can’t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or Stream Direct modes is
selected.
V.HEIGHT
(Virtual Height)
<k>
When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode
allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front
speakers.
OFF
ON
When you’re not using front wide speakers, selecting this mode
allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front
speakers.
This improves the continuity of the sound from the front channel to
the surround channels.
OFF
V.WIDE
(Virtual Wide)
<l>
ON
60
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting the Video options
PDP
Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is con-
nected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid crystal moni-
tors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for professional monitors. If you
want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes,
select MEMORY.
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The
LCD
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.
V.ADJ
(Advanced Video Adjust)
FPJ
PRO
Important
MEMORY
! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the current
source, setting and status of the receiver.
Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.
! All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.
YNR
<d, e>
c
c 0 to +8 d
Default: 0
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.
Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
d
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the
table below for notes on this.
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
Reduces noise in the input’s color (C) signal.
3
Use k/l to set as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for each setting.
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
CNR
<d, e>
c
c 0 to +8 d
Default: 0
Video parameter menu
d
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
V.CONV
(Digital Video Converter)
<a>
ON
Reduces block noise (block-shaped distortion generated upon MPEG
compression) in the picture.
Converts video signals for output from the HDMI OUT connector for
all video types (see page 22).
OFF
AUTO
PURE
480p
BNR
<d, e>
c 0 to +8 d
Default: 0
c
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when video input
signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according
to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch).
(“480p” indicates the 480p/576p resolution setting.)
RES
(Resolution)
<b>
720p
d
1080i
1080p
1080/24p
AUTO
ON
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
Reduces mosquito noise (distortion generated at the contours of the
picture upon MPEG compression) in the picture.
PCINEMA
(PureCinema)
<c, e>
This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning cir-
cuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to AUTO. If the picture
seems unnatural, switch this to ON or OFF.
MNR
<d, e>
c 0 to +8 d
Default: 0
c
OFF
P.MOTION
(Progressive Motion)
<c, e>
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set
to progressive.
c –4 to +4 d
Default: 0
d
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly noticeable OFF
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
in network contents, such as mosquito noise and block noise.
ON
STREAM
When AUTO is selected, this unit’s Stream Smoother function
automatically turns on when network contents are played on the
player supporting Stream Smoother Link and connected to this unit
(Stream Smoother)
<e>
DETAIL
<d, e>
c
c 0 to +8 d
AUTO
by HDMI (assuming that integrated operation with the Control with
HDMI function is set). (Stream Smoother Link)
Default: 0
d
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
61
09
Using other functions
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Setting
What it does
Option(s)
Adjusts the overall brightness.
Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI
output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on
your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping
or black bands appear).
THROUGH
ASP
(Aspect)
<g>
NORMAL
c
BRIGHT
(Brightness)
<d, e>
a
b
! If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
! When connected to a video device using the component video input, set this setting to ON and watch with the HDMI output.
! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture
will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by
HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (see About the video converter on
page 22).
! This setting is valid for HDMI output.
! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON.
! This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (480i/576i or 1080i signals).
Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.
! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals
This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks.
! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.
! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.
0
d
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
c
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
d
e
c
CONTRAST
<d, e>
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
f
g
0
d
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
Adjusts the red/green balance.
c
HUE
c –6 to +6 d
<d, e>
Default: 0
0
d
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.
c
CHROMA
(Chroma Level)
<d, e>
c –6 to +6 d
Default: 0
0
d
(The image is only an example for checking the effect.)
BLK SETUP
(Black Setup)
<f>
Sets the black level according to the video input signal.
Normally select 7.5. If the dark parts of the picture are all black with
this setting, select 0.
7.5
0
62
09
Using other functions
Switching the speaker terminals
If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker system setting on page 81, you can
switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will
simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-
ZONE remote controls on page 63.
1
Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.
1
2
Press
to the receiver operation mode.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
! ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature on
! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
Use SPEAKERS to select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your main
speaker terminal (A) on or off.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select from:
! When the receiver is on, make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE 2 shows in the
! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height channels are added to the front, center and surround chan-
nels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front height
channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5
channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 chan-
nels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.
display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the sub zone.
For example, ZONE 2 DVD sends the source connected to the DVD inputs to the sub room (ZONE 2).
! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets
on page 42 if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time.
Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not
to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.
When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select from:
When Speaker System is set to anything other than ZONE 2, the volume output from the receiver’s AUDIO
ZONE 2 OUT terminals can be fixed to –40 dB or 0 dB and the volume can be adjusted from the connected ampli-
fier. If you want to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier, see ZONE Setup on page 85.
! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The surround back and front wide channels
are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5
channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 chan-
nels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.
When you select Speaker B, you can select from:
5
When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone
controls.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.
! You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control
first.
! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main
rooms so that this receiver is in standby.
! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels (including surround back chan-
nels), depending on the source).
! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel
sources will not be heard.
! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the
two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker termi-
nals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to
2 channels).
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 to operate the ZONE 2.
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE remote controls:
Button(s)
u
What it does
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.
Use to select the input function in the sub zone.
! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the speakers.
INPUT SELECT
Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub
zone.
Input function buttons
Note
! The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 81. However, if SP:
B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
! All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
VOLUME +/–
<a>
Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.
MUTE
<a>
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also
restores the sound).
a
The volume cannot be adjusted on the receiver if Volume Level at ZONE 2 Setup under ZONE Setup is set to –40 dB Fixed or
0 dB Fixed.
63
09
Using other functions
Making an audio or a video recording
You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to
the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the compo-
nents you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on page 16 for
more on connections).
! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect
on the recorded signal.
! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
! Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video if your
source has also been connected using Component video.
%
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the
brightness of the front panel display.
! You can also choose to turn the display off. In this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel process-
ing and your current MCACC preset.
1
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the system
settings.
The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each: Input Source d Sampling
Frequency d MCACC preset d ZONE 2 input.
1
Select the source you want to record.
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT).
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.
2
Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.
3
Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded.
Resetting the system
Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.
Set MULTI-ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF.
! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand.
! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI Setup on page 56).
4
Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels. Refer to the instructions
that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level
automatically-check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.
5
Start recording, then start playback of the source component.
While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET c NO d.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.
3
Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, then press ENTER on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.
! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the receiver is unplugged.
%
time.
Press
to the receiver operation mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep
30 min
Off
60 min
90 min
! You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle
through the sleep options again.
! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.
64
09
Using other functions
Setting
Default
Default system settings
Center Width
Dimension
Panorama
3
Setting
Default
ON
2 PL II Music Options
0
Digital Video Converter
SPEAKERS
OFF
SB/FH
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 Options
Center Image
Speaker System
Normal(SB/FH)
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL
SMALLx2
YES
Front
Center
FH/FW
Surr
2 PL IIz Options
Height Gain
MID
Listening Mode (2 ch/multi ch)
Listening Mode (Headphones)
AUTO SURROUND
STEREO
All Inputs
Speaker Setting
See also Setting the Audio options on page 59 for other default DSP settings.
SB
MCACC
SW
MCACC Position Memory
Channel Level (M1 to M6)
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)
M1: MEMORY 1
0.0 dB
Surround Position
Crossover
X-Curve
IN REAR
80 Hz
10’00’’
OFF
ATT of all channels/filters
Standing Wave (M1 to M6)
0.0 dB
DIMMER
Brightest
SWch Wide Trim
0.0 dB
Inputs
All channels/bands
0.0 dB
EQ Data (M1 to M6)
EQ Wide Trim
See Input function default and possible settings on page 36.
0.0 dB
HDMI
HDMI Audio
Control
Amp
OFF
Control Mode
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
PQLS
--- (OFF)
--- (OFF)
--- (AUTO)
OFF
Standby Through
DSP
Power On Level
Volume Limit
Mute Level
LAST
OFF
FULL
ON
Phase Control
iPod/USB, INTERNET RADIO, SiriusXM,
PANDORA, MEDIA SERVER, FAVORITES, ON
ADAPTER PORT input function
Auto Sound Retriever
Other input functions
OFF
Sound Delay
Dual Mono
DRC
0.0 frame
CH1
AUTO
0 dB
0 dB
OFF
SACD Gain
LFE Attenuate
Auto delay
Digital Safety
OFF
ExtendedStereo
Other modes
90
Effect Level
50
65
Controlling the rest of your system
About the Remote Setup menu....................................................................................................67
Operating multiple receivers........................................................................................................67
Setting the remote to control other components.......................................................................67
Selecting preset codes directly.....................................................................................................67
Programming signals from other remote controls .....................................................................68
Erasing one of the remote control button settings....................................................................68
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function ..........................................................69
Direct function...............................................................................................................................69
About the ALL ZONE STBY (All Zone Standby) and DISCRETE ON (Discrete On) functions.....69
Resetting the remote control settings.........................................................................................69
Controlling components ...............................................................................................................70
66
10
Controlling the rest of your system
About the Remote Setup menu
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The different items
on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the
respective items.
Setting the remote to control other components
Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the compo-
nent’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote
individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on
page 68).
! With the TV CONTROL buttons, the TV can be operated regardless of the input set for the remote control’s
operation mode. When using one TV set, we recommend assigning the same TV’s preset codes to the
TV CONTROL INPUT button and the TV button. When using two TV sets, for better convenience assign the TV
connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals to the TV CONTROL INPUT button, the other TV to the TV button.
! Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons.
Setting
What it does
Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control codes of a number of other
devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be
operated. See Selecting preset codes directly on page 67.
Preset recall
If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control
signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on
page 68.
Code learning
This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit’s operation screen, without changing the receiver’s
Direct function input, when the remote control unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is convenient for using the
remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver. See Direct function on page 69.
RECEIVER ALL ZONE STBY
SOURCE
DISCRETE ON
This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned. Codes learned for the different
Erase learning
input functions can be erased individually. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 68.
RCU SETUP
This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input
Reset function
BDR
BD
TV
DVD
CD
DVR
HDMI
functions. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 69.
This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon ship-
ment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 69.
All reset
NET
ADPT
USB
CBL
SAT
OPTION
If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from
operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page
67.
iPod
TUNER
Change RC
mode
RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
STATUS
VOLUME
INPUT
Note
TV CONTROL
! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RCU SETUP.
! After one minute of inactivity, the remote automatically exits the operation.
CH
VOL
MUTE
Operating multiple receivers
Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver’s remote control when using multiple receiv-
ers, provided they are of the same model as this receiver. The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the
preset code to set the remote control setting.
! Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page
85).
Selecting preset codes directly
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘1’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘4’ for three seconds.
2
Press the input function button for the component you want to control.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
To assign the preset codes of the TV to be operated with the TV CONTROL function, press the TV CONTROL
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
INPUT button.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
2
Press the number button for the receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you wish to
operate.
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset code.
For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’.
If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.
When the preset code is input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed.
See Preset code list on page 106.
If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.
When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this hap-
pens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.
67
10
Controlling the rest of your system
! The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch) apart.
4
Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).
5
Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.
3 cm
(1 inch)
Other remote
control
This receiver’s
remote control
Programming signals from other remote controls
If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you
can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.
The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer
format only).
4
Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the
signal to this receiver’s remote control.
If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.
! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one
input function on page 69 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that
some signals may take more memory than others).
! Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the
wrong signal.
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available
are shown below:
RECEIVER ALL ZONE STBY
SOURCE
DISCRETE ON
! Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to
be moved closer together or farther apart.
RCU SETUP
BDR
5
To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.
To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.
BD
TV
DVD
DVR
HDMI
FEATURES
AUTO
CD
NET
ADPT
PHASE
PQLS
S.RTRV
MCACC
6
Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.
USB
CBL
SAT
OPTION
MPX
BAND
PTY
iPod
TUNER
RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
STATUS
PRESET
TUNE
Erasing one of the remote control button settings
+Favorite
VOLUME
INPUT
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.
1
2
5
3
AUDIO
SIGNAL SEL
4
CH LEVEL
6
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘7’ for three seconds.
TV CONTROL
DISP
CH
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To erase operations registered at the TV CONTROL buttons, proceed to step 3.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
SPEAKERS DIMMER
SLEEP
9
CH
VOL
MUTE
7
8
D.ACCESS
CLASS
ENTER
/
CLR
CH
0
AUDIO
VIDEO
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
AUTO/ALC
2
Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased.
ZONE 2
Z2
DIRECT STANDARD ADV SURR
The LED flashes once.
TOP MENU
TOOLS
MENU
LISTENING MODE
3
Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.
ENTER
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.
HOME
MENU
4
5
Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
RETURN
RECEIVER
Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode.
iPod CTRL
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘2’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To “learn” codes at the TV CONTROL buttons, proceed to step 3.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
2
Press the input function button for the component you want to control.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
3
Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be
doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.
The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.
68
10
Controlling the rest of your system
DISCRETE ON (Discrete On)
The Discrete On function lets you perform a series of operations: switching to the input you want to play while
turning the receiver’s power on.
When the receiver is installed in an AV rack, etc., and you cannot tell whether the power is set to the on or the
standby mode, this operation is handy because it allows you to switch to the selected input without switching the
receiver’s power to standby, even if the power is on when the operation is performed.
Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function
This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input func-
tion, and restores the factory default.
This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘9’ for three seconds.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
Using All Zone Standby
2
Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for
1
Press ALL ZONE STBY DISCRETE ON.
three seconds.
The LED continues to flash.
To erase the operations registered at all the TV CONTROL buttons, press the TV CONTROL INPUT button for 3
seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.
2
Press u RECEIVER.
The receiver’s power switches to standby and all zones are turned off.
Using Discrete On
Direct function
! Default setting: On
1
Press ALL ZONE STBY DISCRETE ON.
The LED continues to flash.
You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same
time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote
control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR
while you continue to listen to your CD player.
2
Press an input function button you want to play.
The receiver’s power turns on (if it was already on, it stays on, without turning off), and the input switches to the
input selected here.
When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control with-
out affecting the receiver.
Resetting the remote control settings
Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘5’ for three seconds.
! When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is
convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
! To cancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP.
1
Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘0’ for three seconds.
2
3
Press the input function button for the component you want to control.
Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the direct function mode.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.
2
Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds.
If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.
4
Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.
Default preset codes
Input function button
Preset code
2255
About the ALL ZONE STBY (All Zone Standby) and DISCRETE ON
(Discrete On) functions
BD
DVD
2197
DVR/BDR
HDMI
2144
ALL ZONE STBY (All Zone Standby)
2034
The All Zone Standby can be used to turn all zones to OFF when the receiver’s power is switched to standby.
Also, when using separate Pioneer amplifiers/receivers for the sub zones, they can also be set to standby
simultaneously.
TV
0305
CD
5000
! In order to set the power of amplifiers/receivers connected to sub zones to the standby mode, the connected
amplifiers/receivers must be installed or connected in such a way that they can receive remote control signals.
! The power of the amplifiers/receivers can be switched to standby with this operation even when using multiple
Pioneer amplifiers/receivers and their Remote Control Mode have been changed.
SAT/CBL
OPTION
TV CONTROL (INPUT)
6329
1103
0305
69
10
Controlling the rest of your system
TV and Audio/Video components
Controlling components
HDD/BDR/
DVR
This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control
other components on page 67 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select the component.
Button(s)
TV
TV (Monitor) BD/DVD
VCR
SAT/CATV
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
u SOURCE
ALL ZONE STBY
DISCRETE ON
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Number buttons
!/CLR
numerics
! (dot)
numerics
numerics
CLEAR
numerics
+
numerics
numerics
*
RCU SETUP
BDR
KURO LINK
CH ENTER
—
—
BD
TV
DVD
DVR
HDMI
ENTER (CLASS)
CH ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
CD
NET
ADPT
EXIT/INFO
EXIT
TOP MENU
TOP MENU
GUIDE
—
—
LIST
USB
CBL
SAT
OPTION
iPod
TUNER
TOOLS/GUIDE/
EPG
TOOLS
<a>
USER MENU
GUIDE
RECEIVER
INPUT SELECT
STATUS
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
—
—
i/j/k/l
VOLUME
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
INPUT
HOME MENU
RETURN
HOME MENU
RETURN
HOME MENU
RETURN
HOME MENU
RETURN
—
—
HOME MENU
RETURN
TV CONTROL
CH
VOL
MUTE
d
—
—
d
d
d
d
AUDIO
VIDEO
e
—
AUTO SETUP
FREEZE
—
e
e
e
e
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
g
—
g
g
g
g
TOOLS
MENU
TOP MENU
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
DISP
—
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
DISPLAY
m
n
o
p
AUDIO
DISPLAY
m
n
—
m
—
—
n
ENTER
ANT
—
AV SELECTION
SCREEN SIZE
AUDIO
o
HOME
MENU
RETURN
—
p
AUDIO
DISPLAY
AUDIO
—
AUDIO
DISPLAY/INFO
iPod CTRL
FEATURES
AUTO
DISPLAY
PHASE
PQLS
S.RTRV
MCACC
OUTPUT RESO-
LUTION +/–
<a>
MPX
BAND
PTY
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
CH +/–
PRESET
TUNE
a
Controls for BD.
+Favorite
AUDIO
DISP
CH
1
2
5
3
SIGNAL SEL
4
CH LEVEL
6
SPEAKERS DIMMER
SLEEP
9
7
8
D.ACCESS
CLASS
ENTER
/
CLR
CH
0
AUTO/ALC
ZONE 2
DIRECT STANDARD ADV SURR
Z2
LISTENING MODE
RECEIVER
70
10
Controlling the rest of your system
Audio/Video components
TV (Projector)
Button(s)
LD
CD/CD-R/SACD
POWER ON/OFF
numerics
MD/DAT
TAPE
Button(s)
TV (Projector)
POWER ON
MOVIE
u SOURCE
POWER ON/OFF
numerics
POWER ON/OFF
numerics
POWER ON/OFF
—
u SOURCE
Number buttons
1
CLEAR
<a>
2
STANDARD
DYNAMIC
USER1
!/CLR
+10
>10/CLEAR
CLEAR
3
OPEN/CLOSE
<a>
4
ENTER (CLASS)
ENTER
TOP MENU
—
DISC/ENTER
—
ENTER
MSc
MSd
5
USER2
—
—
6
USER3
7
COLOR+
SHARP+
GAMMA
LEGATO LINK
<b>
8
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
—
—
—
—
e/g/m/n
9
ENTER
ENTER
—
0
COLOR–
SACD SETUP
<b>
!/CLR
SHARP–
—
—
—
—
—
ENTER (CLASS)
COLOR TEMP
RETURN
—
EXIT
d
d
d
d
d
INFO
e
e
e
e
e
g
g
g
g
g
i/j/k/l
i/j/k/l
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
m
n
o
p
ENTER
ENTER
TEST
HIDE
MENU
PURE AUDIO
<b>
AUDIO
DISP
AUDIO
—
—
—
—
m
d
HDMI1
TIME
<b>
HDMI2
DISPLAY/INFO
n
o
e
COMP.
a
Controls for MD.
VIDEO
b
Controls for SACD.
S-VIDEO
BRIGHT–
BRIGHT+
POWER OFF
ASPECT
g
p
AUDIO
DISP
CH +/–
CONTRAST+/–
71
The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu ....................................................73
Automatic MCACC (Expert)...........................................................................................................73
Manual MCACC setup ...................................................................................................................75
Checking MCACC Data ..................................................................................................................77
Data Management.........................................................................................................................78
72
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one set-
ting (to save time) if you want.
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu
— When data measurement is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics
data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.
— When measurement is performed with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System),
the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics
after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics
after calibration (“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC
setup (page 75).
— The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 76 for more on this.
— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the
respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 59.
! EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how the
frequency balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately
in the MCACC memory.
— SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the
frequency-amplitude characteristics.
— ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to
any one channel.
— FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied
to the front left and right channels).
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with
the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and
with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency
response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the
sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before. Furthermore, while it was previously dif-
ficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique
process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data
manually.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu.
3
4
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 for
a quick and effective automatic surround setup.
! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73 for a more detailed MCACC setup.
! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual
MCACC setup on page 75).
! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the
test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.
If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset
where you want to save the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.
! THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES
when using THX speakers (all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases, leave
at NO.
! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In
addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for sev-
eral seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen
and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position:
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your sys-
tem differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions
depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the
TV).
3rd reference
point
2nd reference
point
1
2
Important
! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
3
! The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity.
Main listening
position
CAUTION
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC
menu on page 73.
2
Select the parameters you want to set.
Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to set.
73
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears
automatically.
iPod
iPhone
iPad
USB
HDMI 5 INPUT
MCACC
SETUP MIC VIDEO
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but
it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or
Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page 81).
! Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12
cm (5 inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual
speaker setup on page 81.
! The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This set-
ting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to
be changed.
! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
Microphone
Tripod
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If
you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.
! It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen
(see Checking MCACC Data on page 77).
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to
the Home Menu.
4
5
6
When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.
Follow the instructions on-screen.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present
in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
! With error messages (such as Too much ambient noise! or Check microphone.), select RETRY after check-
ing for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 35) and verifying the mic
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.
! Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in
step 8.
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem
with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker con-
nections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to
change the setting and continue.
! If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the
phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are
properly connected.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.
— If the connections were wrong, turn off the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.
After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.
— If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and continue.
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum
receiver settings.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.
74
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more
familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically con-
ducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34.
Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like
both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.
! For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i/j to select it.
You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
CAUTION
Fine Speaker Distance
! Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of
each speaker in half inch increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 81.
! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume.
Important
! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.
! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it
about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you
connect the microphone to this receiver.
! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 35 for notes regarding high background noise
levels and other possible interference.
1
2
3
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.
! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position.
Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker.
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening position, face the two
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.
! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your
speakers very slightly.
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 73 if you’re not already at this screen.
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.
! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel
Level on page 75).
! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page
75).
! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room (see Standing Wave on
page 76).
! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from other channels. Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can
be heard distinctly. Note that when adjusting the subwoofer, depending on the low frequency response of
your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when
the position of the speaker is changed. Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speak-
ers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
on page 76:
! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 76).
! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
on page 76).
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.
! For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.
! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply use i/j to select it.
Fine Channel Level
! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can
adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 81.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.
! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.
75
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
Standing Wave
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based
on the direct sound coming from the speakers.
Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem
overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different
channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate
mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the
overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening posi-
tion, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a
source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets.
! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI
connection.
! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies
Low frequencies
Level
High frequencies
1
2
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).
Time
(in msec)
! TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compen-
sate for the difference in output post-filter).
! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).
80
160
0
! Type B: Reverb characteristics for different channels
Front L
Front R
Level
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.
calibration range
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/bands)
Time
(in msec)
0
80
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works
by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can
color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjust-
ment provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic
MCACC (Expert) on page 73, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits
your tastes.
160
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1
2
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.
Select an option and press ENTER.
1
2
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.
! Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.
! Reverb View – You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each
channel.
Use i/j to select the channel.
— If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning
(Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave
control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the rever-
berations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the
characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement
function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indi-
cates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the
reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the
Reverb Measurement function.
! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibra-
tion using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied
with these settings.
Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of
the screen and press k to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the channel.
! The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this
happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.
Note
! Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker bal-
ance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to
select TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.
76
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.
Checking MCACC Data
At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, the proce-
dure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 75, you
can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.
The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in
Reverb View:
! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by
this receiver (before calibration).
! EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this
receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments neces-
sary for your listening area.
— The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is
selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.
— After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred
reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured
reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
2
3
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Home Menu.
Select the setting you want to check.
! Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 77 for
more on this.
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 91 for troubleshooting information.
! Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the different speakers. See Channel Level on page 77 for
more on this.
! Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on page 77
for more on this.
! Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 78 for
more on this.
! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response.
See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 78 for more on this.
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel.
Press RETURN when you’re done.
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements
are conducted.
Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use i/j to go back and
forth between the three. The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by
selecting Calibration : Before / After. Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.
4
Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check
other settings.
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the
desired time setting for calibration, and then select START.
! To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory
you want to store.
5
You will return to the Home Menu.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency
adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use
the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the
direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.
Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to switch between them.
Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms,
40-60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.
Speaker Setting
Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 81 for more on this.
1
2
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
Select the channel you want to check.
Use i/j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.
Channel Level
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See Channel Level on page 82 for more on this.
1
2
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.
The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that
are not connected.
Speaker Distance
Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance on
page 82 for more on this.
1
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.
The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for chan-
nels that are not connected.
77
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
Standing Wave
Data Management
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing
Wave on page 76 for more on this.
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listen-
ing positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to
match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa,
or playing a video game close to the TV).
1
2
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel for which you want to
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any
ones you don’t need.
! This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73, either of which you should have already completed.
check standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its
graph are displayed.
3
Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
check.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
Acoustic Cal EQ
2
3
Select ‘Data Management’ from the Home Menu.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different
MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 76 for more on this.
! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on
1
2
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.
page 78).
! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel.
on page 78).
The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset
and its graph are displayed.
! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on
page 79).
3
Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier
identification.
1
2
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.
Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to select a preset name.
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 75), we recom-
mend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you
a reference point from which to start.
! The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73.
1
2
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data Management setup menu.
Select the setting you want to copy.
! All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory.
! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC pre-
set memory.
3
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you
want to copy them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
78
11
The Advanced MCACC menu
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration
settings of that preset.
1
2
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data Management setup menu.
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically
return to the Data Management setup menu.
79
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu............................................................81
Manual speaker setup...................................................................................................................81
Network Setup menu....................................................................................................................83
Checking the Network Information.............................................................................................84
The Other Setup menu..................................................................................................................84
80
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu
screen.
The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other
settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).
Speaker system setting
! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)
There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater
setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.
1
Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.
2
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
1
Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 81 if you’re not already at this screen.
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
2
Select the speaker system setting.
! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home theater use with front height speakers in your main (speaker sys-
tem A) setup.
! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number dis-
tance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see Manual speaker setup on page 81).
! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see The
Input Setup menu on page 36).
! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home theater use with front wide speakers in your main (speaker system
A) setup.
! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 63).
! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on
page 20).
! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language can be changed (see Changing the OSD display lan-
guage (OSD Language) on page 34).
! Network Setup – Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network (see Network Setup
menu on page 83).
! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI (page
55).
! Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup
menu on page 84).
! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 63).
3
If you selected Normal(SB/FH), Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement
of the surround speakers.
In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position,
the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the surround
speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it
should be.
Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to
achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need
to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new
speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in
Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, it isn’t necessary to make all of
these settings.
! ON SIDE – Select when the surround speakers is positioned right beside you.
! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you.
4
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
CAUTION
! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume.
Speaker Setting
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It
is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full
Auto MCACC) on page 34 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set
independently.
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 81 if you’re not already at this screen.
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! Speaker System – Specifies how you are using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker termi-
nals (page 81).
! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
1
2
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of speakers you’ve connected (page 81).
! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system (page 82).
! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position (page 82).
! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks (page 82).
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.
81
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO
(the center channel is sent to the front speakers).
! FH – Select LARGE if your front height speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height speakers, choose
NO (the front height channel is sent to the front speakers).
— You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FH).
— If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.
! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to
send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose
NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers).
— You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW).
— If the surround speakers are set to NO, this setting will automatically be set to NO.
! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send
bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the
sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).
! SB – Select the number of surround back speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send
bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose
NO.
— If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Speaker system setting on page 81) you can’t adjust the sur-
round back settings.
— If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES
is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you
want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also
routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output
from other speakers).
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor
when setting up a home theater system.
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
The test tones will start.
2
Adjust the level of each channel using k/l.
Use i/j to switch speakers.
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.
! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and
adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
! You can change the channel levels by press
then using k/l on the remote control.
to the receiver operation mode, then press CH LEVEL, and
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from
the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.
1
2
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
Adjust the distance of each speaker using k/l.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1/2 inch Increments.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers
and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker
placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency
cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results,
listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL
alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to
route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.
If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center, sur-
round, surround back, front height and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to
SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Note
! For best surround sound, make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening
position.
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts
as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks.
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.
1
2
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
! This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or
the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff
will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.
! With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at
achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human
aural characteristics.
Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting
at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:
Room size (ft2)
≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0
X-Curve
(dB/oct)
! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
82
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port
Network Setup menu
This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address
of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the
‘Proxy Port’ field.
Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions.
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
1
2
Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the Network Setup menu.
Select the DHCP setting you want.
2
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.
Select ‘Network Setup’ from the System Setup menu.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
When you select ON, the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps 3. Proceed with
Step 4.
If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to
determine the IP address.
! The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio sta-
tion if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/Proxy of this receiver (page 83).
! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby
mode (page 83).
3
Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and
Secondary DNS Server.
Press i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.
! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network
can be changed (page 83).
! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network functions (page 84).
4
Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy
! Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of the ports where signals from IP Control are received (page 84).
server.
In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.
IP address/Proxy setting
5
Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.
In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP
server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need to set up the network manually.
You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband
router without a DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network man-
ager for the required settings. It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network
component.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
6
Enter the port number of your proxy server.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
7
Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/Proxy setup.
! In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corre-
sponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.
Network Standby
This setting allows the AVNavigator function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same
LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.
IP Address
1
2
Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Setup menu.
Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.
The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the
following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio
stations.
! ON – The AVNavigator function can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.
! OFF – The AVNavigator function cannot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode (This lets you
reduce power consumption in the standby mode).
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
Friendly Name
Subnet Mask
1
2
Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the Network Setup menu.
Select ‘Edit Name’ then select ‘Rename’.
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask pro-
vided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.
If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default.
Default Gateway
3
Input the name you want.
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Primary DNS Server/Secondary DNS Server
In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the ‘Primary DNS Server’
field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS
server address field.
83
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
Parental Lock
The Other Setup menu
Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions.
! Upon shipment from the factory, the password is set to “0000”.
The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
Important
When the INTERNET RADIO, SiriusXM, PANDORA or FAVORITES input is selected, the setting made here can-
not be reflected.
2
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
Select the setting you want to adjust.
1
2
Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the Network Setup menu.
Input the password.
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:
! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn off automatically when the receiver is not being used.
! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related operations of this receiver (page 84).
! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s remote control mode (page 85).
! Software Update – Use to update the receiver’s software and check the version.
! ZONE Setup – Use to make the sub zone-related settings (page 85).
3
Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.
! OFF – Internet services are not restricted.
! ON – Internet services are restricted.
4
If you want to change the password, select Change Password.
In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each
screen.
Port Number Setting
On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers of ports where signals are received. One of these, port 8102 cannot
be changed, but the desired number can be set for the 4 other ports.
Auto Power Down
The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time
with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver. When using ZONE 2, the ZONE 2 power can also be set
to turn off, but for ZONE 2 the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are
being input or operations have been performed.
1
2
3
Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the Network Setup menu.
Select the port number you want to change.
Input the port number.
Different times can be set for the main zone and ZONE 2.
! Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
! It is not possible to set the same port number more than once.
1
2
Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Other Setup menu.
Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.
4
If there are other port numbers you want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.
! MAIN – The time can be selected from among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and “OFF”. The power turns off
after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.
Note
! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and
“OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.
! When the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300) is connected, the port number cannot be set to port 3.
! We recommend setting the port number to 23 or within the range of 49152 to 65535.
! When the port number is changed, network communications between the receiver and AVNavigator are no
longer possible. In this case, click Settings on the AVNavigator’s function menu, select the IP Address tab and
input one of the port numbers set on the receiver side to enable communications with AVNavigator.
Note
! Depending on the connected devices, the Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive
noise or other reasons.
Volume Setup
Checking the Network Information
You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is
turned on.
The setting status of the following network-related items can be checked.
! IP Address – Check the IP address of this receiver.
! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of this receiver.
! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 83.
1
2
Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
Select the Power ON Level setting you want.
The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.
! LAST (default) – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last
turned off.
1
Press
on the remote control, then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.
! “---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set to minimum level.
! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on, in steps of 0.5 dB.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).
2
Select ‘Network Information’ from the Home Menu.
Display the setting status of the network-related items.
84
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you want.
1
2
Select ‘Software Update’ from the Other Setup menu.
Select the update procedure.
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by
operating VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).
! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not limited.
! Update via Internet – The receiver checks whether updatable software is available via the Internet.
! Update via USB Memory – The receiver checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port
on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.
! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is limited to the value set here.
4
Select the Mute Level setting you want.
“Accessing” is displayed and the update file is checked. Wait a while.
This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.
3
Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.
If “New version found.” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are
displayed.
! FULL (default) – No sound.
! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be turned down to the level specified here.
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
If “This is the latest version. There is no need to update.” is displayed, no update file has been found.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
4
To update, select OK.
The updating screen appears and updating is performed.
Remote Control Mode Setup
! Default setting: 1
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver
are being used.
! The power turns off automatically once updating is completed.
Software Update messages
Status messages
Descriptions
1
2
3
4
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.
Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still
occurs, try using a different USB memory device.
FILE ERROR
No update file was found on the USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root
directory.
Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.
Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.
UPDATE ERROR 1 to
UPDATE ERROR 7
Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.
See Operating multiple receivers on page 67.
If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a
USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating
starts automatically.
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Update via USB
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
UE11
UE22
UE33
Software Update
Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.
Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the
Internet and via a USB memory device.
Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file.
This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.
Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this
file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front
panel. With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB
port on the receiver’s front panel.
! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer website, download it onto your computer. When downloading an
update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before
saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models
on the USB memory device, delete them.
ZONE Setup
When making multi-zone connections using the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals and performing playback in Zone
2, you can set whether to adjust the Zone 2 volume on the receiver or to fix it to a specific volume (–40 dB Fixed
or 0 dB Fixed). This is set to Variable upon shipment from the factory, allowing the volume to be adjusted on the
receiver. If you would like to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier, make the setting below.
! This setting is not possible if multi-zone settings have been made using the speaker terminals and
Speaker System is set to anything other than ZONE 2. In this case, adjust the volume for the sub zones on the
receiver.
CAUTION
Important
! Note that when Volume Level is set to 0 dB Fixed, the audio output from the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals
is set to the maximum. Also, depending on the volume setting on the connected amplifier, large volumes may
be produced even when Volume Level is set to –40 dB Fixed.
! DO NOT unplug the power cord during updating.
! When updating via the Internet, do not disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device,
do not disconnect the USB memory device.
1
2
Select ‘ZONE Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.
Select ‘ZONE 2’, then press ENTER.
! If updating is interrupted before it is completed, start updating over from the beginning.
! The receiver’s settings may be reset when the software is updated. Information on the models for which the
settings are reset is provided on the Pioneer website. Check the website before updating.
85
12
The System Setup and Other Setup menus
3
Select the Volume Level setting you want.
! Variable (default) – The Zone 2 volume is adjusted from the receiver.
! –40 dB Fixed/0 dB Fixed – The Zone 2 volume level output from the receiver is fixed to the value set here.
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
86
FAQ
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................88
Power..............................................................................................................................................88
No sound ........................................................................................................................................88
Other audio problems...................................................................................................................89
ADAPTER PORT terminal...............................................................................................................90
Video...............................................................................................................................................90
Settings...........................................................................................................................................90
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output.............................................................................91
Display............................................................................................................................................91
Remote control ..............................................................................................................................91
HDMI...............................................................................................................................................91
AVNavigator ..................................................................................................................................92
USB interface..................................................................................................................................93
iPod.................................................................................................................................................93
Network..........................................................................................................................................93
Wireless LAN..................................................................................................................................94
87
13
FAQ
Symptom
Remedy
Troubleshooting
AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the dis-
play and the FL OFF indicator flash
and the power turns off.
Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on (see
Installing the receiver on page 8).
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong
with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate
the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercis-
ing the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair
work.
Check whether the cables used to connect the speakers are short-circuited.
Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.
Lower the volume level.
! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on
the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR.
An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power
back on.
! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The
power will turn off. In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared. (However, settings
made when the power was turned off normally are not cleared.)
No sound
Symptom
Remedy
No sound is output when an input
function is selected.
No sound is output from the front
speakers.
Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).
Make sure the correct input function is selected.
Power
Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL).
Symptom
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
Press the remote control’s ZONE 2, then press u RECEIVER to switch the Zone 2 off.
Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal
format (see Setting the Audio options on page 59).
Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment
on page 16).
Power cannot be turned off.
(ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)
Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page
19).
The receiver suddenly switches off
or the iPod iPhone iPad indicator
blinks.
Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another
set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.
No sound from the surround or
center speakers.
Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t
selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying various types of play-
back using the listening modes on page 46).
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer
authorized independent service company.
During loud playback the power sud- Turn down the volume.
denly switches off.
Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page
81).
Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 75.
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel,
press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to
select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY
cOFFd to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn
down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.
Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 82).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
No sound from surround back
speakers.
Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround
speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 81).
The unit does not respond when the
buttons are pressed.
Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19). If only one
surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel
speaker terminal.
Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.
AMP ERR blinks in the display, then The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the
the power automatically switches off. receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and
Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and
audio is being played through speaker B.
the power does not turn on.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: FH ON or
SP: FW ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the sur-
round back speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON or SP: SB ON (see Switching
the speaker terminals on page 63).
The receiver suddenly switches off or There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the power. If the
the FL OFF indicator blinks.
same thing happens, the receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call
a Pioneer authorized independent service company. (Other symptoms may appear when
the power is turned on.)
88
13
FAQ
Symptom
Remedy
Symptom
Remedy
No sound from front height or front
wide speakers.
Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the
surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 81).
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or there is
considerable noise in radio broad-
casts.
Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a
wall, etc.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: SB ON is
selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from the front height or
front wide speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON, SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON (see
Switching the speaker terminals on page 63).
Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 28).
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light,
motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
Noise is output when scanning a
DTS CD.
This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume
when scanning.
No sound from subwoofer.
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 81).
When playing a DTS format LD there Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on
is audible noise on the soundtrack.
page 47).
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteris-
tics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 81).
Can’t record audio.
You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording
from an analog source.
If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your
speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS
(see Speaker Setting on page 81).
For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
Subwoofer output is very low.
To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL
(see Speaker Setting on page 81).
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see Setting the
Audio options on page 59).
Everything seems to be set up cor-
rectly, but the playback sound is odd. the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connect-
ing the speakers on page 19).
The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 82).
Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 19).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 82).
Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 81).
No sound from one speaker.
The Phase Control feature doesn’t
seem to have an audible effect.
If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass
cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your sub-
woofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the
best overall effect on the sound).
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect
listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Enjoying various
types of playback using the listening modes on page 46).
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance
on page 82).
Sound is produced from analog
components, but not from digital
ones (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).
Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page
47).
Noise or hum can be heard even
when there is no sound being input. power source are not causing interference.
Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same
Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is
connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).
Can’t select some Input functions by Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input Setup menu on
the INPUT SELECTOR on the front
panel or the INPUT SELECT button
on the remote control.
page 36).
Check the digital output settings on the source component.
Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF (see The Input
Setup menu on page 36).
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
No sound is output or a noise is out- Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
There seems to be a time lag
See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 to
put when Dolby Digital/DTS software
is played back.
between the speakers and the output set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in
Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD or DVD
player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
of the subwoofer.
the subwoofer output).
The maximum volume available
(shown in the front panel display) is
lower than the +12dB maximum.
Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 84).
The channel level setting may be over 0.0dB.
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.
No sound when using the
Home Menu.
If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu.
Certain listening modes or
HOME MENU items cannot be
selected.
When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and
not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set
Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode Setup on page 37).
The volume level drops automati-
cally.
The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value. Try moving the unit for
better ventilation (see Installing the receiver on page 8).
Other audio problems
Symptom
Remedy
Speaker switching sound (clicking
Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and surround back
sound) is heard from receiver during speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio. A speaker
playback.
switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from the receiver at this time. If this sound
bothers you, we recommend to change the speaker terminal option (see Switching the
speaker terminals on page 63).
89
13
FAQ
Symptom
Remedy
ADAPTER PORT terminal
Video signals are not output from the When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component
component terminal.
terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may
not be output to the monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do
the following:
— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.
— Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting the Video options on
page 61).
— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals.
Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component
terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it at Input Setup (see The Input
Setup menu on page 36).
Symptom
Remedy
The Bluetooth wireless technology
Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (microwave
device cannot be connected or oper- oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus) is near the unit. If
ated. Sound from the Bluetooth wire- such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it. Or, stop using the object emitting
less technology device is not emitted the electromagnetic waves.
or the sound is interrupted.
Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that
obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit.
Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between
them is less than about 10 m (33 ft.) and no obstructions exist between them.
Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly
connected.
The picture's movement is unnatural. When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p, the picture may not be
displayed properly for some source materials. In this case, set the resolution to some-
thing other than 1080/24p (page 61).
The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode
supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless
technology device.
Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the Blue-
tooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.
Settings
Symptom
Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports
A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.
Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup continually
shows an error.
The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as
possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 35). If the noise
level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually
(page 81).
Video
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L
(Single) terminals.
Symptom
Remedy
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel,
not the surround back channel.
No image is output when an input is Check the video connections of the source component.
selected.
For HDMI, or when V.CONV is set to OFF and a TV and another component are con-
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
nected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 61), you must connect
your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your
video component. For the component video input, however, signals are only output from
the HDMI output, so when using the component video input, set V.CONV to ON.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.
— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase
may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select
GO NEXT and continue.
Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component
video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).
— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using
speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be
possible to properly identify the polarity.
Check the video output settings of the source component.
Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be con-
verted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page
61) and/or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switch-
ing V.CONV (in Setting the Video options on page 61) to OFF.
After using the Auto MCACC Setup,
the speaker size setting is incorrect. motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.
There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner,
Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers, room
size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting
manually in Speaker Setting on page 81, and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for
the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73 if this is a recurring
problem.
Can’t record video.
Check that the source is not copy-protected.
The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type
of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you
want to record) to this receiver.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Dis-
tance setting properly.
Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals are matched up properly).
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted
picture.
Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example),
or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The
picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off
the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of
connection (component or composite), then start playback again.
The display shows KEY LOCK ON
when you try to make settings.
With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 5 seconds while holding
down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have been
erased.
The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplug-
ging the power cord.
90
13
FAQ
Symptom
Remedy
Symptom
Remedy
The various system settings are not
stored.
Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings will be stored
when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all zones before pulling out the
power cord.)
When playing certain discs, none of
the receiver’s format indicators light. what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on
When playing a disc with the listen-
ing mode set to Auto Surround or
ALC, 2 Pro Logic II or DTS Neo:6
appear on the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on
page 47).
Certain listening modes or
HOME MENU items cannot be
selected.
When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings are made and
not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions without restrictions, set
Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode Setup on page 37).
If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded),
then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio
tracks available.
During playback of DVD-Audio, the
display shows PCM.
This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a
malfunction.
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom
The power turns off automatically
and some indicator flashes, or some
indicator flashes and the power does
not turn on.
See the Power section (page 88).
Remedy
The reverb characteristics graph
after EQ calibration does not appear in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room character-
entirely flat.
There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ
istics to achieve optimal sound.
Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no
adjustment needed.
Remote control
Symptom
The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after mea-
surements.
Remedy
EQ adjustments made using the
Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these
Cannot be remote controlled.
Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the
main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 67).
Manual MCACC setup do not appear adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration. However, these
to change the reverb characteristics adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
graph after EQ calibration.
Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control
Mode Setup on page 85).
Lower frequency response curves do Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for
not seem to have been calibrated for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these
Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 8).
Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 ft.) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front
panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 8).
SMALL speakers.
frequencies.
Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measur-
able sound is output for display.
Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.
Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote
sensor.
Other components can’t be operated If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset
Display
Symptom
with the system remote.
codes.
The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.
Remedy
When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the
learning function, in some cases they may not be learned properly. In this case, register
the commands again using the learning function (see page 68). If they still do not work,
they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote con-
trol. Operate the device using another remote control.
The display is dark or off.
The OSD screen is not displayed.
Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
The OSD screen is not displayed unless the receiver and TV are connected using an
HDMI cable. If the TV does not support HDMI, perform the various operations and make
the settings while watching the display on the receiver’s front panel.
You can’t get DIGITAL to display
when using SIGNAL SEL.
Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned cor-
rectly (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not light
when playing Dolby/DTS software.
These indicators do not light if playback is paused.
HDMI
Symptom
Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.
Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
When playing Dolby Digital or DTS
sources, the receiver’s format indica-
tors do not light.
Remedy
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on
page 47).
The HDMI indicator blinks continu-
ously.
Check all the points below.
Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to
PCM.
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is
selected.
91
13
FAQ
Symptom
Remedy
AVNavigator
Symptom
No picture or sound.
This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are
also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or
composite video jacks.
Causes
Remedy
AVNavigator cannot be
installed.
An error message may appear
if there are not enough system
resources available.
Re-start the PC, then start install with no other applications
active.
Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with
this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component
or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
Installation of AVNavigator may fail
because of incompatibilities with
other applications.
Try the following, in the order indicated.
1. If there are any other applications active, exit the other
applications and try to start install again.
2. If that does not work, try restarting your PC, then start
install with no other applications active.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your
monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer
for support.
If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color or other
setting for your component.
AVNavigator does not inter- The receiver’s power is not turned
Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about 60 seconds after
the power turns on for network functions to start.)
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the
receiver.
act well with the receiver.
on.
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for
audio output.
To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI® Cable) to con-
nect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.
The receiver or computer is not con- Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer (page 30).
nected to the LAN.
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the
receiver.
No picture.
Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 61).
Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the Audio options on page 59).
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
The router’s power is off.
Turn the router’s power on.
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the
receiver.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the
audio.
AVNavigator’s network settings are
not correct.
If your router does not support DHCP, the receiver’s
IP address must be set in AVNavigator. First set the IP
address on the receiver, then set the same address in
AVNavigator (page 83).
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the
receiver.
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized. Due
to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or
beginning playback.
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback,
or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or inter-
rupted audio.
Network connections could be
restricted due to the computer’s net- etc.
work settings, security settings, etc.
Check the computer’s network settings, security settings,
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the
receiver.
Noisy or distorted picture.
Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example),
or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The
picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off
the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of
connection (component or composite), then start playback again.
When the operating instructions
interactive mode is changed, the
settings may not be transferred to
the browser, causing AVNavigator to
stop interacting.
Either refresh the page’s display using the browser’s
refresh button or display a different page from the links so
that the setting is transferred.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your
monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer
for support.
When the Wiring Navi,
Operation Guide,
This is because of the browser’s
security function.
This is not a problem. Perform the operation to authorize
the blocked contents.
HDCP ERROR shows in the display.
Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not
compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection
(component or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause
this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video,
this is not a malfunction.
InteractiveManual,Glossary
or Software Update is
launched, a warning about
security protection appears
on the browser.
Synchronized operation not possible Check the HDMI connections.
Software updating does not There may be a problem with your
operate well. Internet Service Provider’s network.
Contact your contracted provider.
using Control with HDMI function.
The cable may be damaged.
Select ON for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 56).
Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instructions).
92
13
FAQ
USB interface
Network
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
The folders/files stored on a The folders/files are currently stored Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
USB memory device are not in a region other than the FAT (File
displayed.
Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly con-
nected.
Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 30).
Allocation Table) region.
The router is not switched on.
Switch on the router.
The number of levels in a folder is
more than 9.
Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 9 (page
41).
Internet security software is cur-
rently installed in the connected
component.
There are cases where a component with Internet security
software installed cannot be accessed.
The audio files are copyrighted.
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device
cannot be played back (page 41).
The audio component on the net-
work which has been switched off is switching on this receiver.
switched on.
Switch on the audio component on the network before
A USB memory device is
not recognized.
The USB memory device does not
support the mass storage class
specifications.
Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass
storage class specifications. Note that there are cases
where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class specifications are
not played back on this receiver (page 41).
Playback does not start
while “Connecting...” con- nected from this receiver or the
tinues to be displayed.
The component is currently discon-
Check whether the component is properly connected to
this receiver or the power supply.
power supply.
Connect the USB memory device and switch on this
receiver (page 31).
The PC or Internet radio is
not properly operated.
The corresponding IP address is not Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of your router,
properly set.
or set up the network manually according to your network
environment (page 83).
A USB hub is currently being used.
This receiver does not support USB hubs (page 41).
Switch off and on again this receiver.
This receiver recognizes the USB
memory device as a fraud.
The IP address is being automati-
cally configured.
The automatic configuration process takes time. Please
wait.
Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off.
The audio files stored on
components on the net-
work, such as a PC, cannot rently installed on your PC.
Windows Media Player 11 or
Windows Media Player 12 is not cur- 12 on your PC (page 50).
Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player
Change to an input other than iPod/USB, then set the input
back to iPod/USB.
A USB memory device is
connected and displayed,
but the audio files stored
on the USB memory device receiver.
cannot be played back.
Some formats of USB memory
devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, and either FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and
HFS, cannot be played back on this
Check whether the format of your USB memory device is
be played back.
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC cannot be
played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows
Media Player 12. Try using another server. Refer to the
operation manual supplied with your server.
AAC or FLAC are being played back
on Windows Media Player 11 or
Windows Media Player 12.
HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver (page
41).
The file format cannot be properly
played back on this receiver.
See the list of file formats that can be played back on this
receiver (page 42).
The component connected to the
network is not properly operated.
Check whether the component is affected by special cir-
cumstances or is in the sleep mode.
Try rebooting the component if necessary.
The component connected to the
Try changing the settings for the component connected to
network does not permit file sharing. the network.
iPod
Symptoms
The folder stored on the component
connected to the network has been
deleted or damaged.
Check the folder stored on the component connected to
the network.
Causes
Remedies
iPod is not recognized.
This receiver recognizes the iPod as
a fraud.
Switch off and on again this receiver.
Reconnect the iPod with the receiver switched off.
Network connections could be
Check the computer’s network settings, security settings,
restricted due to the computer’s net- etc.
work settings, security settings, etc.
Change to an input other than iPod/USB, then set the input
back to iPod/USB.
Cannot access the com-
ponent connected to the
network.
The component connected to the
network is not properly set.
If the client is automatically authorized, you need to enter
the corresponding information again. Check whether the
connection status is set to “Do not authorize”.
There are no playable audio files on
the component connected to the
network.
Check the audio files stored on the component connected
to the network.
93
13
FAQ
Symptoms
Causes
Remedies
Wireless LAN
Audio playback is undesir-
ably stopped or disturbed.
The audio file currently being played Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format sup-
back was not recorded in a format
playable on this receiver.
ported by this receiver.
Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN.
Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted.
Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed
as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or
displayed (page 54).
Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. (Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” and “Wireless” indica-
tors are not all lit.)
!
Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver’s DC OUTPUT for
WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected.
The LAN cable is currently discon-
nected.
Connect the LAN cable properly (page 30).
WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver’s display window.
There is heavy traffic on the network Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on the net-
with the Internet being accessed on
the same network.
!
There is a problem with the wireless LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the receiver’s power off, then
disconnect the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver’s power back on.
If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times, there is a problem
with the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized inde-
pendent service company.
work.
!
When in the DMR mode, depending In this case, adjust the volume from the receiver or remote
on the external controller being used, control.
playback may be interrupted when a
volume operation is performed from
the controller.
The LAN cable is not firmly connected.
Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 31).
!
There is a connection routed through There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2.4 GHz band
a wireless LAN on the same network. used by the wireless LAN. Make wired LAN connections not
routed through a wireless LAN.
Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or there is an obstacle
between them.
!
Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit closer
together, etc.
Install away from any devices emitting electromagnetic
waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave ovens, game con-
soles, etc.). If this does not solve the problem, stop using
other devices that emit electromagnetic waves.
There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN
environment.
!
Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electromagnetic
waves.
Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the system with
the wireless LAN.
Cannot access Windows
Media Player 11 or
Windows Media Player 12.
In case of Windows Media Player
11: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows XP or Windows Vista
installed.
In case of Windows Media Player
12: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows 7 installed.
Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local
machine (page 51).
!
Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router.
When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters, their IP addresses must be changed.
!
Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless
LAN router, etc.).
Cannot listen to Internet
radio stations.
The firewall settings for components Check the firewall settings for components on the network.
on the network are currently in
operation.
!
The wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections. For details, see
the CD-ROM included with the wireless LAN converter.
The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of the wireless
LAN router, etc.
!
You are currently disconnected from Check the connection settings for components on the
the Internet.
network, and consult with your network service provider if
necessary (page 83).
Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter (including the DHCP setting).
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power back on.
Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings of the wireless
LAN router, etc.
The broadcasts from an Internet
radio station are stopped or inter-
rupted.
There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet
radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Inter-
net radio stations on this receiver (page 51).
If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address matching the network of the base unit (wireless
LAN router, etc.).
For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP address to
“192.168.1.XXX” (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, the gateway and DNS to “192.168.1.1”.
Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249” (*2).
The Network functions
cannot be operated with
the buttons on the remote
control.
The remote control is not currently
set to the Network function mode.
Press NET to set the remote control to the Network func-
tion mode (page 51).
(*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to other devices.
(*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to other devices.
94
13
FAQ
Try making the wireless LAN converter’s advanced settings.
!
The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless LAN settings.
For details, see the CD-ROM included for the wireless LAN converter. Check the settings of the wireless
LAN router, etc., then change the settings of the wireless LAN converter.
Note, however, that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve the wireless
LAN environment. Be careful when changing the settings.
The access point is set to conceal the SSID.
!
In this case, the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen. If not, set the SSID, etc., by
making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually.
The access point’s security settings use WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.
The receiver does not support WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.
Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken.
!
!
Reset the wireless LAN converter. After this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s settings.
About resetting
1. Check that the wireless LAN converter’s power is on.
2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s reset button for at least 3 seconds.
3. Release the reset button.
When the wireless LAN converter is restarted, the resetting procedure is completed.
95
Additional information
Surround sound formats...............................................................................................................97
About iPod .....................................................................................................................................97
About SiriusXM..............................................................................................................................97
About FLAC ....................................................................................................................................97
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats...........................98
Speaker Setting Guide ..................................................................................................................98
About messages displayed when using network functions......................................................99
Important information regarding the HDMI connection .........................................................100
Cleaning the unit .........................................................................................................................100
Preset code list.............................................................................................................................106
96
14
Additional information
Surround sound formats
About SiriusXM
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Hardware and subscription sold separately. SiriusXM service automatically renews and you will be billed, at then-
current rates, until you call us at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel.
See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
Canadian service available at www.sirius.ca or www.xmradio.ca.
Be sure to read these agreements before you purchase your subscription.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
About FLAC
DTS
FLAC Decoder
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007
Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.
! Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the follow-
ing disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and
the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes
software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
About iPod
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to
connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless
performance.
Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod shuffle, iPod nano, iPod touch, iTunes and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The AirPlay logo is a trademark of Apple Inc.
97
14
Additional information
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal
formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct
mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 47) you have selected.
Speaker Setting Guide
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is important to accurately position the speakers and make
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi-channel sound.
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance, angle and orientation (the direction in
which the speakers are pointing).
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be equal.
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical.
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is pos-
sible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm (0.5 inch) using the Full Auto
MCACC Setup function (page 34).
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Auto Surround / ALC /
Input signal format
PURE DIRECT
DIRECT
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Stereo playback
As above
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) from the
surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles
from the listening position (center of the adjustments). (We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position.
PCM sources
As above
DVD-A sources
As above
SACD sources
As above
As above
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
Dolby Digital Surround
DTS Surround
Note
2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
As above
2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
Neo:6 CINEMA
Stereo playback
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
Stereo playback
As above
! If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance
correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to make them equalize the distance artificially.
Other stereo sources
Analog sources
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid- and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point
it to the listening position.
PCM sources
As above
DVD-A sources
As above
SACD sources
As above
As above
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears.
Multichannel signal formats
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation
Input signal format
Auto Surround / ALC
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction, the tone will not be the same on the right
and left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed
towards the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped. Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research
Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards
an area 30 cm (12 inches) to 80 cm (31 inches) behind the listening position (between the surround speakers and
the listening position).
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when the front speakers are close to the listening position),
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward. We suggest you use this example of installation as
reference when trying out different installation methods.
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
<a>
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
<a>
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-HD Master Audio ES (6.1 channel flagged)
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)
DTS-HD sources
DTS-ES (Matrix)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Straight decoding
As above
DTS-ES (Matrix)
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Straight decoding
As above
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM
As above
As above
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer
Straight decoding
As above
Straight decoding
As above
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound more natural (if
there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound output
from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is placed
on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers.
As above
As above
a
Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
98
14
Additional information
Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively
amplify the bass sound.
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape of the room this could result in stand-
ing waves. However, even if standing waves are generated, their influence on the sound quality can be prevented
using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave control function (page 76).
About messages displayed when using network functions
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Network
functions.
Status messages
Connection Down
File Format Error
Track Not Found
Server Error
Descriptions
The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.
Cannot be played back for some reasons.
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound field
correction) function
It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup (page 34) procedure once the adjustments described
above have been completed.
The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.
The selected server cannot be accessed.
Server Disconnected
Empty
The server has been disconnected.
There are no files stored in the selected folder.
The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.
License Error
Note
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has
already been registered.
! The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure,
etc. This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.
Item Already Exists
Favorite List Full
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the
Favorites folder is already full.
Positional relationship between speakers and monitor
Position of front speakers and monitor
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor.
R
L
45° to 60°
Position of center speaker and monitor
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker, keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position.
(Diagram as seen
from the side)
Installation on floor
Monitor
! If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install it away from the TV.
! When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards the listen-
ing position.
99
14
Additional information
Important information regarding the HDMI connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on
the HDMI-equipped component you are connecting-check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility
information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the
following configurations when connecting up.
Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s
component video input. The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI sig-
nal for transmission to the display. For this configuration, use the most convenient connection (digital is recom-
mended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for more on audio connections.
Note
! The picture quality will change slightly during conversion.
Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most conve-
nient connection (digital is recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the operating instructions for
more on audio connections. Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration.
Note
! If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component.
! Depending on the component, audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the
connected display unit (for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio
limitations).
! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display
unit.
! Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on the
display every time you switch input functions.
Cleaning the unit
! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt.
! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with
water, and wrung out well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or cleansers.
! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will cor-
rode the surface.
100
14
Additional information
Decoding
Glossary
A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal process-
ing circuit, etc., into the original signals. The term “decoding” (or “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technol-
ogy which converts 2-channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel signals into 6.1 or
7.1 channels.
Audio formats/Decoding
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed information.
Calibrating the sound field/Improving the sound quality
Phase Control
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and
digital broadcast soundtracks.
Dolby TrueHD
Virtual Surround Back
Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming
era.
When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back
channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel
information.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high-definition programming and media. It combines the effi-
ciency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected
in the upcoming high-definition era.
Virtual Height
When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel
through your front speakers.
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Virtual Wide
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.
When you’re not using front wide speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel
through your front speakers.
Virtual Depth
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field with
the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system.
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.
Auto Sound Retriever
The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged arti-
facts left over after compression.
With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of
the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality.
Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to
the previous horizontally-oriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of three-
dimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.
Sound Retriever Air
DTS
Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending Bluetooth signals.
The DTS technologies are explained below. See http://www.dts.com for more detailed information.
PQLS
DTS Digital Surround
Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections.
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-
Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games.
ALC (Auto Level Control)
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the vol-
ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at
night.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to
listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables.
Front Stage Surround Advance
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality of the original sound.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.
MCACC
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced fea-
tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and
from 5.1 channel sources.
101
14
Additional information
Windows Media Player 11/Windows Media Player 12
Windows Media Player is software to deliver music, photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to
home stereo systems and TVs.
With this software, you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your
home.
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s website.
! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or Windows Vista)
! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7)
HDMI
Control with HDMI function
Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player are pos-
sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.
! The receiver’s input switches over automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-
compatible component is played.
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, when the TV’s power is set to standby.
For more information check the official Microsoft website.
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of
the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.
The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection with the TV can be com-
pleted with a single HDMI cable.
Windows Media DRM
Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It is
designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or video content over an IP network to a PC or other playback
device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected content
can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service.
Router
Network function
AirPlay
A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network. In homes, routers often also function as
DHCP servers. Products with built-in wireless LAN access points are called “wireless LAN routers”.
This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), iPhone 4S,
iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad, iPad 2 with iOS 4.2 or later, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later.
For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com).
DHCP
Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for automatically assigning such setting infor-
mation as IP addresses within network connections. This offers convenience in that, when enabled, it allows
network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network.
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, comput-
ing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media
through a wired or wireless network in the home.
Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi
“Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition
of wireless LAN standards. With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years,
Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wire-
less connection. As a way of reassuring users, products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo
“Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is assured.
vTuner
vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet.
vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe. For more detail about
vTuner, visit the following website:
WPS
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry group for a function
allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made
with simple operations. There are a number of methods, including push-button configuration and PIN code con-
figuration. This AV receiver supports both push-button configuration and PIN code configuration.
“This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.”
aacPlus
SSID
AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)
Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wireless LAN access point identifier. Can be set as desired using up to 32
characters of English letters and numbers.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC with-
out any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC, visit the following website:
http://flac.sourceforge.net/
Windows Media
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows. Windows
Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media formatted
content. Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.
102
14
Additional information
Bluetooth function
Bluetooth wireless technology
A short-range wireless communications standard for digital devices. Information is exchanged between devices
several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves. It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which
does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange
of digital information at relatively low speeds, such as computer mouses and keyboards, mobile phones, smart-
phones, text and audio information for PDAs, etc.
Pairing
“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth
ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared.
The pairing step is necessary to register the Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communi-
cations. For more details, see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless
technology device.
Receiver function
Operation Mode
This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided
for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings.
103
14
Additional information
Slideshow
Features index
See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 41.
Bluetooth ADAPTER
See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 43.
Operation Mode
See Operation Mode Setup on page 37.
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
See HDMI Setup on page 56.
AVNavigator
See About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 9.
SACD Gain
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Full Auto MCACC
See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34.
Auto delay
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 73.
Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option)
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Manual MCACC setup
See Manual MCACC setup on page 75.
Virtual Surround Back
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
PQLS
See Setting the PQLS function on page 57.
Virtual Height
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Phase Control
See Better sound using Phase Control on page 48.
Virtual Wide
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Standing Wave
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Virtual Depth
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Phase Control Plus
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Digital Video Converter
See Setting the Video options on page 61.
Auto Sound Retriever
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Pure Cinema
See Setting the Video options on page 61.
ALC (Auto Level Control)
See Auto playback on page 46.
Progressive Motion
See Setting the Video options on page 61.
Front Stage Surround Advance
See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 46.
Advanced Video Adjust
See Setting the Video options on page 61.
Sound Retriever Air
See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 46.
Auto Power Down
See The Other Setup menu on page 84.
Dialog Enhancement
See Setting the Audio options on page 59.
Internet radio
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 51.
vTuner
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 51.
DLNA
See About network playback on page 52.
AirPlay
See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes on page 50.
Wireless LAN
See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 31.
Playback High Resolution audio file
See About playable file formats on page 54.
See Playing a USB device on page 41.
104
14
Additional information
Miscellaneous
Specifications
Power requirements .................................................................................................................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption..................................................................................................................................................550 W
In standby..........................................................................................................0.2 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)
0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)
Dimensions ................................................................................................... 435 mm (W) x 168 mm (H) x 362.5 mm (D)
(17 3/16 in. (W) x 6 5/8 in. (H) x 14 5/16 in. (D))
Amplifier section
Continuous average power output of 90 watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz
with no more than 0.08 %** total harmonic distortion.
Front (stereo).......................................................................................................................................... 90 W + 90 W
Guaranteed speaker impedance..................................................................................................................... 6 W to 16 W
Weight (without package) .............................................................................................................................9.9 kg (22 lb)
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for
Amplifiers
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer
Number of Furnished Parts
MCACC Setup microphone..............................................................................................................................................1
Remote control unit..........................................................................................................................................................1
AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries..................................................................................................................................2
iPod cable..........................................................................................................................................................................1
AM loop antenna...............................................................................................................................................................1
FM wire antenna ...............................................................................................................................................................1
Power cord
Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE .......................................................................................................................................................315 mV/47 kW
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC.......................................................................................................................................................315 mV/2.2 kW
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)
CD-ROM
LINE .................................................................................................................................................................. 100 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]
Quick start guide
Safety Brochure
Warranty sheet
LINE .................................................................................................................................................................... 81 dB
Tuner Section
Frequency Range (FM) ....................................................................................................................87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input (FM)................................................................................................................................ 75 W unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM)......................................................................................................................530 kHz to 1700 kHz
Antenna (AM)............................................................................................................................Loop antenna (balanced)
Note
! Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice, due to improvements.
! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of
NEC Corporation.
Video Section
Signal level
Composite Video.................................................................................................................................... 1 Vp-p (75 W)
Component Video ....................................................................................Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W)
Corresponding maximum resolution
Component Video ................................................................................................. 1080p (1125p) (Video convert off)
Digital In/Out Section
HDMI terminal ......................................................................................................................................... 19-pin (Not DVI)
HDMI output type............................................................................................................................................ 5 V, 100 mA
USB terminal......................................................................................................................... USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)
iPod terminal....................................................................................................................... USB, and Video (Composite)
ADAPTER PORT terminal............................................................................................................................... 5 V, 100 mA
WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal .............................................................................................................. 5 V, 600 mA
Integrated Control Section
Control (IR) terminal....................................................................................................................ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
IR signal.............................................................................................................................High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
12 V Trigger terminal....................................................................................................................ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
12 V Trigger output type....................................................................................................................... 12 V, Total 150 mA
RS-232C cable type ........................................................................................................9-pin, cross type, female-female
Network Section
LAN terminal ...............................................................................................................................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
105
14
Additional information
Penney 0100, 0102
Philco 0003, 0004, 0005,
0006, 0007, 0100, 0101
Philips 0003, 0004, 0007,
0019, 0020, 0101
Philips Magnavox 0019
Pilot 0004, 0100
Polaroid 0057, 0106
Portland 0004, 0005, 0006
Prima 0065
Princeton 0097
Prism 0010
Proscan 0000
Proton 0004, 0006, 0007
Protron 0055
Sylvania 0004, 0006, 0049,
0079, 0080, 0100, 0101, 0103
Symphonic 0008, 0041,
0103, 0104
Syntax 0054
Syntax-Brillian 0054
Tandy 0014
Tatung 0003, 0108
Technics 0010, 0105
Techwood 0004, 0006, 0010
Teknika 0001, 0004, 0005,
0006, 0007, 0008, 0009, 0101,
0104
TMK 0004, 0006
TNCi 0099
Toshiba 0026, 0028, 0036,
0038, 0040, 0043, 0102
Vector Research 0100
Vidikron 0101
Preset code list
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that
there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. There
are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code.
Important
! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not be possible
even if a preset code is entered.
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote
individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on
page 68).
Proview 0068
TV
Pulsar 0004, 0011, 0099
Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105
Radio Shack 0100, 0104
Radio Shack/Realistic 0000, Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006
0004, 0006, 0007, 0008 Viewsonic 0058, 0107
RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, 0005, Viking 0012
0006, 0013, 0024, 0035
Realistic 0100, 0104
Runco 0011, 0099, 0100
Sampo 0004, 0006, 0100,
0107
Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006,
0007, 0022, 0032, 0076, 0077, White Westinghouse 0023
0083, 0100, 0110
Sansui 0025
Sanyo 0004, 0050
Sceptre 0072
Pioneer 0004, 0006, 0113,
0233, 0252, 0275, 0291, 0305 Contec 0104
Concerto 0004, 0006
GFM 0080, 0084
Gibralter 0004, 0011, 0099,
0100
Goldstar 0004, 0005, 0006,
0007, 0100
Gradiente 0066
Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104
Haier 0112
Hallmark 0004, 0006
Harman/Kardon 0101
Harvard 0008, 0104
Havermy 0014
Hewlett Packard 0053
Hisense 0069
Hitachi 0004, 0006, 0007
Hyundai 0098
Ilo 0089, 0091
IMA 0008
Luxman 0004, 0006
LXI 0000, 0006, 0101, 0102
Magnavox 0004, 0006,
0019, 0020, 0037, 0042, 0100,
0101
Majestic 0001
Marantz 0004, 0006, 0062,
0100, 0101
Maxent 0087, 0107
Megapower 0097
Megatron 0006
Memorex 0001, 0005, 0006,
0041
MGA 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100
Midland 0010, 0011, 0099
Mintek 0091
Mitsubishi 0004, 0005, 0006,
0014, 0045
Monivision 0097
Montgomery Ward 0001
Motorola 0003, 0014
MTC 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100
Multitech 0008, 0104, 0110
NAD 0006, 0102
Admiral 0001, 0014
Adventura 0012
Aiwa 0002
Akai 0002, 0100
Albatron 0097
Alleron 0009
America Action 0104
Amtron 0008
Contec/Cony 0007, 0008
Craig 0008, 0104
Crosley 0081, 0101
Crown 0008, 0104
CTX 0063
Curtis Mathes 0000, 0004,
0006, 0014, 0100, 0101
CXC 0008, 0104
Viore 0089
Vizio 0004, 0070, 0071, 0108
Wards 0000, 0001, 0004,
0005, 0006, 0009, 0100, 0101
Waycon 0102
Anam 0104
Anam National 0003, 0008
AOC 0004, 0005, 0006, 0100 0023
Cytron 0093
Daewoo 0004, 0005, 0006,
Westinghouse 0047, 0051
Yamaha 0004, 0005, 0006,
0100
Zenith 0001, 0004, 0011,
0015, 0099
Apex 0021, 0102, 0106
Audiovox 0008, 0104
Aventura 0103
Axion 0094
Bang & Olufsen 0111
Belcor 0004
Bell & Howell 0001
Benq 0064
Bradford 0008, 0104
Brillian 0109
Brockwood 0004
Broksonic 0104
Candle 0004, 0006, 0012,
0100
Carnivale 0100
Carver 0101
CCE 0110
Celebrity 0002
Celera 0106
Daytron 0004, 0006
Dell 0073
DiamondVision 0096
Dimensia 0000
Disney 0046
Dumont 0004, 0011, 0099
Durabrand 0041, 0103, 0104 InFocus 0074
Dwin 0014
Electroband 0002
Electrograph 0107
Electrohome 0002, 0003,
0004, 0006
Element 0082
Emerson 0004, 0006, 0007,
Scotch 0006
Scott 0004, 0006, 0007, 0008,
0009, 0090, 0104
Sears 0000, 0004, 0006,
0009, 0101, 0102, 0103
Sharp 0004, 0006, 0007,
0014, 0033
Sheng Chia 0014
Shogun 0004
Signature 0001
Infinity 0101
Initial 0091
Insignia 0085, 0086
Inteq 0099
Janeil 0012
JBL 0101
NEC 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006,
JC Penney 0000, 0004, 0005, 0100
0006, 0010 Net-TV 0107
Sony 0002, 0018, 0029, 0030,
0031, 0034
0008, 0009, 0023, 0103, 0104 JCB 0002
Nikko 0006, 0100
Norcent 0060
Olevia 0048, 0054, 0059
Onwa 0008, 0104
Oppo 0095
Emprex 0092
Envision 0004, 0006, 0100
Epson 0061
ESA 0103
Fujitsu 0009
Jensen 0004, 0006
Soundesign 0004, 0006,
0008, 0009, 0104
Squareview 0103
SSS 0004, 0008, 0104
Starlite 0008, 0104
Superscan 0014
Supre-Macy 0012
Supreme 0002
JVC 0007, 0010, 0044
Kawasho 0002, 0004, 0006
KEC 0104
Kenwood 0004, 0006, 0100 Optimus 0105
Optoma 0075
Kloss Novabeam 0008, 0012 Optonica 0014
KTV 0008, 0100, 0104, 0110
LG 0005, 0052, 0078, 0097
Logik 0001
Changhong 0106
Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008,
0100
Clarion 0104
Coby 0056
Funai 0008, 0009, 0103, 0104 KLH 0106
Futuretech 0008, 0104
Gateway 0067, 0107, 0108
GE 0000, 0003, 0004, 0006,
0010, 0016, 0039
Orion 0025
Panasonic 0003, 0010, 0017,
0027, 0105, 0114
SVA 0088
Colortyme 0004, 0006
106
14
Additional information
DVD
VCR
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset
codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
Pioneer 1035, 1108
ABS 1017
Adventura 1005
Aiwa 1005
Alienware 1017
American High 1004
Asha 1002
Audio Dynamics 1000
Audiovox 1003
Bang & Olufsen 1032
Beaumark 1002
Bell & Howell 1001
Calix 1003
Garrard 1005
Gateway 1017
GE 1002, 1004
Microsoft 1017
Mind 1017
Mitsubishi 1010
Motorola 1004
MTC 1002
Multitech 1002, 1005
NEC 1000, 1001
Nikko 1003
Niveus Media 1017
Noblex 1002
Sanky 1018
Sansui 1014, 1019
Sanyo 1001, 1002
Sears 1001, 1003, 1004
Sharp 1012
Shogun 1002
Singer 1004
Sonic Blue 1026
Sony 1006, 1009, 1017, 1021
Stack 1017
Pioneer 2014, 2197, 2256
Accurian 2092
Advent 2072
Aiwa 2012
Akai 2066
Alco 2070
Allegro 2087
Amphion MediaWorks
2037
Daewoo 2021, 2087
Denon 2026, 2068
Desay 2055
DiamondVision 2042
Disney 2022
Durabrand 2090
Emerson 2067, 2082, 2091
Enterprise 2082
ESA 2053, 2091
KLH 2070, 2080
Koss 2024, 2069, 2075
Landel 2093
Rowa 2071
GOI 1029
Samsung 2009, 2011, 2015,
2031, 2044, 2068
Sansui 2066
Sanyo 2066, 2083
Sharp 2035
Sherwood 2063
Shinsonic 2086
Sonic Blue 2087
Goldstar 1000, 1003
Gradiente 1005
Harley Davidson 1005
Harman/Kardon 1000
Headquarter 1001
Hewlett Packard 1017
HNS 1016
Howard Computers 1017
HP 1017
HTS 1029
Hughes Network Systems Panasonic 1004, 1008
1016, 1020, 1022, 1023, 1024 Philco 1004
Humax 1016, 1020
Hush 1017
iBUYPOWER 1017
Instant Replay 1004
Lasonic 2085
Lenoxx 2074, 2090
LG 2019, 2051, 2061, 2082,
2087
Liquid Video 2075
Liteon 2025, 2092
Northgate 1017
Olympus 1004
Optimus 1003
Orion 1014, 1019
STS 1004
Sylvania 1004, 1005
Symphonic 1005
Systemax 1017
Tagar Systems 1017
Tandy 1001
AMW 2037
Fisher 2083
Magnavox 2067, 2076, 2091 Sony 2003, 2004, 2010, 2012,
Apex 2002, 2018, 2079, 2080 Funai 2091
Memorex 2066
Microsoft 2077
Mintek 2038, 2080, 2086
Mitsubishi 2020
Nesa 2080
2027, 2046, 2047, 2048
Sungale 2054
Superscan 2067
Sylvania 2023, 2067, 2091
Symphonic 2023
Teac 2070
Candle 1002, 1003
Canon 1004
Apple 2058
GE 2016, 2077, 2080
Arrgo 2088
GFM 2043
Citizen 1002, 1003
Colortyme 1000
Craig 1002, 1003
Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002,
1004
Cybernex 1002
CyberPower 1017
Daewoo 1005
DBX 1000
Dell 1017
DIRECTV 1016, 1020, 1022,
1023, 1024, 1027, 1030, 1031 LG 1003
Dish Network 1029
Dishpro 1029
Durabrand 1018
Dynatech 1005
Echostar 1029
Electrohome 1003
Electrophonic 1003
Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005
Expressvu 1029
Fisher 1001
Aspire 2073
Astar 2052
Audiovox 2070
Axion 2040
Go Video 2087
Gradiente 2068
Greenhill 2080
Haier 2094
Philips 1004, 1011, 1016,
1020, 1022, 1023, 1024, 1025 Teac 1005
Philips Magnavox 1011
Pilot 1003
Tashiko 1003
Next Base 2093
Nexxtech 2056
Technics 1004
Technics 2068
Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005
Tivo 1016, 1020, 1021, 1022,
1025
Bang & Olufsen 2081
Blaupunkt 2080
Blue Parade 2078
Boston 2059
Harman/Kardon 2030, 2084 Onkyo 2076
Theta Digital 2078
Toshiba 2001, 2006, 2049,
2066, 2076
JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002, Proscan 1030
1003, 1004
JCL 1004
JVC 1000, 1001, 1020, 1029
Kenwood 1000, 1001
Kodak 1003, 1004
Hitachi 2011
Hiteker 2079
iLive 2062
Ilo 2038
Oppo 2041, 2057
Oritron 2069, 2075
Panasonic 2005, 2007, 2017, Trutech 2000
Pulsar 1018
Quarter 1001
Quartz 1001
Quasar 1004
Radio Shack 1003
Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, UltimateTV 1031
1002, 1003, 1004, 1005
Radix 1003
Randex 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1007, 1016, Videosonic 1002
1020, 1022, 1030, 1031
Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005
TMK 1002
Toshiba 1015, 1017, 1028
Totevision 1002, 1003
Touch 1017
Broksonic 2066
2032, 2033, 2050, 2068, 2076 Urban Concepts 2076
California Audio Labs 2068 Initial 2038, 2080
Philips 2045, 2076
Proceed 2079
Proscan 2077
Qwestar 2069
RCA 2008, 2016, 2070, 2077, Zenith 2019, 2076, 2082,
US Logic 2086
Venturer 2070
Xbox 2077
CambridgeSoundWorks
2065
Insignia 2036, 2064, 2091
Integra 2078
iSymphony 2060
JBL 2084
Linksys 1017
Lloyd’s 1005
LXI 1003
Magnavox 1004, 1018
Magnin 1003
Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004
Marta 1003
Media Center PC 1017
MEI 1004
Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003, Runco 1018
1004, 1005, 1018, 1019
Unitech 1002
Vector Research 1000
Video Concepts 1000
CineVision 2087
Coby 2029
Yamaha 2005, 2068
Curtis Mathes 2089
CyberHome 2000, 2088
Cytron 2039
JVC 2013
Kawasaki 2070
Kenwood 2028, 2068
2078, 2080
Regent 2074
Rio 2087
2087
Viewsonic 1017
Voodoo 1017
Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005
XR-1000 1004, 1005,
Yamaha 1000, 1001
Zenith 1013, 1018
ZT Group 1017
ReplayTV 1026
Ricavision 1017
BD
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset
codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR).
Fuji 1004
Funai 1005
Samsung 1002, 1016, 1022,
1024
MGN Technology 1002
Pioneer 2034, 2192, 2255,
2258, 2259, 2260, 2281
Denon 2310, 2311, 2312
Hitachi 2307, 2308, 2309
JVC 2290, 2291, 2293, 2294,
2295, 2296
LG 2286, 2287
Marantz 2302, 2303
Mitsubishi 2300, 2301
Onkyo 2289
Sony 2283, 2284, 2285, 2292
Panasonic 2277, 2278, 2279 Toshiba 2288, 2262
Philips 2280
Samsung 2282
Sharp 2304, 2305, 2306
Yamaha 2297, 2298, 2299
CD
Pioneer 5000, 5011, 5070
AKAI 5043
Kenwood 5020, 5021, 5031 RCA 5013, 5029
Luxman 5049
Technics 5041
Victor 5014
Roadstar 5052
Asuka 5045
Marantz 5033
Sharp 5051
Yamaha 5024, 5025, 5038,
Denon 5019
Fisher 5048
Goldstar 5040
Hitachi 5042
Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030,
5050
Panasonic 5036
Philips 5022, 5032, 5044
Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, 5027, 5046, 5047
5028, 5039
TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034, 5035,
5037
DVR (BDR, HDR)
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations with the preset
codes for the DVD, BD.
Pioneer 2078, 2099, 2107,
2109, 2144, 2193, 2194, 2195, 2270
2196, 2257, 2258, 2259, Panasonic 2263, 2269
2260, 2261, 2264, 2265, 2266, Sharp 2267, 2275
Toshiba 2274
Sony 2268, 2271, 2272, 2273,
2276
107
14
Additional information
Pace 6074, 6029, 6028,
6106, 6083
Regal 6072
Rogers 6029
Starcom 6122
Stargate 6122
United Cable 6072, 6122
US Electronics 6072
Satellite Set Top Box
Panasonic 6112, 6083
Paragon 6112
Penney 6112
Philips 6012
Pulsar 6112
Runco 6112
Suddenlink 6074, 6029
Supercable 6072
Time Warner 6074, 6029,
6058
Tivo 6076
Toshiba 6112
Videoway 6112
Zenith 6112
Pioneer 6097, 6098, 6325,
6328, 6329
ADB 6035, 6001
Akai 6102
Alba 6005, 6011, 6013
Allsat 6102
Alltech 6011
Amstrad 6033, 6030, 6044
Anttron 6013
Asat 6102
Austar 6000, 6045
Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6003
British Sky Broadcasting
6030
Expressvu 6002, 6004
Fortec Star 6123, 6023
Fresat 6014
Funai 6070
GE 6111
General Instrument 6032
GOI 6002, 6004
Grundig 6007, 6030
Hirschmann 6033
Hisense 6020
Hitachi 6038, 6049
Houston 6002
HTS 6002, 6004
nfusion 6015
Nokia 6025, 6026, 6118,
6119, 6121
Pace 6035, 6005, 6030, 6031 TechniSat 6033
Panarex 6016
Panasonic 6008, 6009, 6030 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, 6116
Pansat 6016, 6022
Philips 6002, 6113, 6038,
6054, 6060, 6059, 6102, 6103, Triasat 6033
Sony 6062, 6063, 6030
Star Choice 6032
Star Trak 6032
Samsung 6095
Scientific Atlanta 6029,
6028, 6027, 6112
Sejin 6077
Thomson 6110, 6111, 6014
Quasar 6112
Shaw 6074
Toshiba 6038, 6054, 6039
TPS 6041
Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)
Pioneer 6029, 6325, 6328,
6329
6030, 6114
Ultrasat 6021
US Digital 6020
USDTV 6020
ViewSat 6048
Voom 6032
Comcast 6074, 6029, 6083,
6076
Cox 6074, 6029
Digeo 6081, 6058
Homecast 6024
Insight 6074, 6029
Knology 6029
Motorola 6074, 6081
Myrio 6078
Pace 6029
Panasonic 6083
Rogers 6029
Scientific Atlanta 6029
Shaw 6074
Supercable 6072
Time Warner 6074, 6029,
6058
Primestar 6032
Proscan 6110, 6111
Proton 6020
Amino 6078
Bright House 6074, 6029
Cable One 6074, 6029
Cablevision 6074, 6029
Charter 6074, 6029, 6058
Cisco 6029, 6083
Tivo 6076
Hughes Network Systems RadioShack 6002, 6111,
6113, 6038, 6054, 6114, 6115, 6032
6116
Hyundai 6016
iLo 6020
Canal 6105
Chaparral 6034
CNS 6001
Zehnder 6101
Zenith 6042, 6069, 6037
Radix 6036
RCA 6002, 6110, 6111, 6113,
6109, 6061, 6114
Mediacom 6074, 6029
Suddenlink 6074, 6029
Coolsat 6021
Crossdigital 6043
Digenius 6104
Digiwave 6053
DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6111,
6062, 6063, 6113, 6008, 6038, LG 6047, 6018
6054, 6069, 6060, 6059, 6043, Marantz 6102
6018, 6114, 6115, 6116, 6093 McIntosh 6032
Dish Network System
6002, 6089, 6003, 6004
Dishpro 6002, 6089, 6004
Echostar 6002, 6089, 6036,
6005, 6003, 6004
Innova 6059
Jerrold 6032
Kathrein 6096
Lava 6053
Saba 6014
CD-R
Pioneer 5001, 5053, 5071
Philips 5054
Sagem 6041, 6120
Samsung 6070, 6113, 6091,
6043, 6017, 6114, 6093
Sanyo 6046
Sat Cruiser 6015
Schwaiger 6066
Siemens 6007, 6036
SKY 6042, 6059, 6030, 6031
SM Electronic 6011
Smart 6051
Yamaha 5055
Tuner
Pioneer 5060
Mitsubishi 6038
Motorola 6032, 6042
NEC 6050, 6131
Netsat 6059
Laser Disc Player
Pioneer 5002, 5003
Next Level 6032
Sonicview 6055, 6107
Cassete Deck
Pioneer 5058, 5059
Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)
Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6003
Dishpro 6002, 6089
Motorola 6032
Philips 6113, 6114
Proscan 6110
Star Choice 6032
Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, 6116
DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6062,
Echostar 6002, 6089, 6003
Digital Tape
6113, 6060, 6059, 6114, 6115, Expressvu 6002
6116
Hughes Network Systems Samsung 6114
Pioneer 5057
Dish Network System
6002, 6089
6113, 6114, 6115, 6116
JVC 6003
Sonicview 6055, 6107
Sony 6062
MD
Pioneer 5056
Cable Set Top Box
Pioneer 0297, 6028, 6029,
Network Audio Player
Cable One 6074, 6029
Fosgate 6072
Macab 6040
Pioneer 5063
6095, 6099, 6325, 6328, 6329 Cablevision 6074, 6029
General Instrument 6073,
6072, 6122
Homecast 6024
i3 Micro 6077
Insight 6074, 6073, 6029
Jebsee 6122
Jerrold 6073, 6072, 6122
Knology 6029
Mediacom 6074, 6029
Memorex 6112
Motorola 6074, 6073, 6072,
6029, 6122, 6094
MTS 6094
ABC 6122
Charter 6074, 6029, 6058
Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083
Comcast 6074, 6029, 1982
Cox 6074, 6029
Accuphase 6122
Amino 6077, 6078
Auna 6082
Game
X-Box 2313
BCC 6072
Digeo 6029, 6058
Myrio 6077, 6078
Noos 6040
Bell & Howell 6122
Bright House 6074, 6029
Director 6073
Emerson 6122
AV Receiver
Pioneer 5096 (ID 1), 5097 (ID 2), 5098 (ID 3), 5099 (ID 4),
108
To register your product, find the nearest authorized service location, to
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories,
please go to one of following URLs :
Pour enregistrer votre produit, trouver le service après-vente agréé le plus
proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes d’emploi ou
des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes :
In the USA/Aux Etats-Unis
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
In Canada/Aux Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
S018_B1_EnFr
PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P. O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B3_En
© 2012 PIONEER CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
<ARB7477-A>
|